Daik Manual

SiAF341904E
Service
Manual
High-COP Type RXQ12-44AHRY1 Series

Standard Type RXQ6-60A(N)RY1 Series
Cooling Only 50/60 Hz

SiAF341904E
Introduction .................................................................................... 1
1. Safety Cautions.......................................................................................2
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers.............................2
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users.................................4
2. Icons Used ..............................................................................................6
3. Revision History ......................................................................................7
Part 1 General Information ............................................................ 8

1. Model Names ..........................................................................................9
1.1 Indoor Unit................................................................................................9
1.2 Outdoor Unit .............................................................................................9
2. External Appearance.............................................................................10
2.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................10
2.2 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................11
3. Combination of Outdoor Units...............................................................13
4. Capacity Range.....................................................................................15
4.1 Capacity Range for VRV Indoor Units Only ...........................................15
5. Specifications ........................................................................................18
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit ............................................................. 41

1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) ...................................................42
1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................42
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................46
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................47
2.1 RXQ6/8/10/12A ......................................................................................47
2.2 RXQ14/16/18/20A ..................................................................................48
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................49
3.1 RXQ6/8/10/12/14A .................................................................................49
3.2 RXQ16/18/20A .......................................................................................51
Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................. 53

1. Applicable Models .................................................................................54
2. Names and Functions ...........................................................................56
2.1 BRC1E62 ...............................................................................................56
2.2 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................58
2.3 BRC4C, BRC7E Series ..........................................................................60
2.4 BRC4M151W16 .....................................................................................61
3. Main/Sub Setting...................................................................................64
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E62, BRC1E63) ..................................64
3.2 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together.............................65
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller...................................66
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting..................................................70
5.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63 .............................................................................70
5.2 BRC4C, BRC7E Series ..........................................................................72
5.3 Group No. Setting Example....................................................................72
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu..........................................73
6.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63 .............................................................................73
6.2 BRC4C, BRC7E Series ..........................................................................77
i Table of Contents
SiAF341904E
Part 4 Functions and Control ....................................................... 78

1. Operation Flowchart..............................................................................79
2. Stop Control ..........................................................................................80
2.1 Abnormal Shutdown ...............................................................................80
2.2 Slave Unit Stops during Master Unit Operation......................................80
3. Standby Control ....................................................................................81
3.1 Restart Standby......................................................................................81
4. Startup Control ......................................................................................82
4.1 Cooling Startup Control ..........................................................................82
5. Normal Operation..................................................................................83
5.1 List of Functions in Normal Operation ....................................................83
5.2 Compressor Control ...............................................................................83
5.3 Compressor Capacity Control ................................................................84
5.4 Operating Priority and Rotation of Compressors....................................85
5.5 Compressor Step Control.......................................................................86
5.6 Step Control of Outdoor Fans ................................................................86
6. Protection Control .................................................................................87
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................87
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................87
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................88
6.4 Compressor Body Protection Control.....................................................88
6.5 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................89
7. Special Control......................................................................................90
7.1 Outdoor Unit Rotation.............................................................................90
7.2 Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................91
7.3 Inverter Pre-Heat Operation ...................................................................92
8. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................93
8.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature................................93
8.2 Thermostat Control.................................................................................93
8.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control ..............................................................95
8.4 Airflow Direction Control.........................................................................96
8.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFSQ only) ...........................................97
8.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFSQ only)..............................................97
8.7 Drain Pump Control................................................................................98
8.8 Freeze-Up Prevention Control..............................................................100
8.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control ................................................101
8.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .....................................................102
8.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFSQ only)..........................................................103
Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation .................................. 105

1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit...............................................................106
1.1 Field Settings from Remote Controller .................................................106
1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit .....................................................111
1.3 Applicable Range of Field Settings ......................................................113
1.4 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit................................................114
1.5 Operation Control Mode .......................................................................126
2. Field Settings for Outdoor Unit............................................................128
2.1 Function Setting ...................................................................................128
2.2 Settings by DIP Switches .....................................................................129
2.3 Settings by BS Buttons.........................................................................132
Table of Contents ii
SiAF341904E
2.4 Normal Mode........................................................................................134

2.5 Monitor Mode (Mode 1) ........................................................................135
2.6 Setting Mode (Mode 2).........................................................................139
2.7 Eco Mode Setting .................................................................................150
2.8 Setting of Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation...151
3. Test Operation ....................................................................................155
3.1 Checks before Test Operation .............................................................155
3.2 Checkpoints..........................................................................................155
3.3 Test Operation Procedure ....................................................................156
3.4 Turn Power ON ....................................................................................157
Part 6 Service Diagnosis ............................................................ 158

1. Servicing Items to be Confirmed .........................................................160
1.1 Troubleshooting....................................................................................160
1.2 Precautions for Maintenance................................................................160
2. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................162
2.1 With Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor.....................................164
2.2 For All Outdoor Units............................................................................165
3. Refrigerant Properties (R-410A) .........................................................166
4. Troubleshooting with Remote Controller.............................................167
4.1 Wired Remote Controller......................................................................167
4.2 BRC4C, BRC7E Series ........................................................................168
4.3 BRC4M151W16 ...................................................................................170
4.4 Error Codes and Descriptions ..............................................................171
4.5 Error Codes (Sub Codes).....................................................................173
5. Troubleshooting by Error Code ...........................................................183
5.1 External Protection Device Abnormality ...............................................183
5.2 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality ...............................................................184
5.3 Drain Level Control System Abnormality..............................................185
5.4 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload.........................................................187
5.5 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality..............................................................189
5.6 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality ......................................................194
5.7 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust Clogging ..............197
5.8 Humidifier System Abnormality ............................................................198
5.9 Auto Grille Unit Error ............................................................................199
5.10 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality ........................................200
5.11 Transmission Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and
Fan PCB)..............................................................................................201
5.12 Transmission Error ...............................................................................203
5.13 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and
Auto Grille Control PCB) ......................................................................204
5.14 Thermistor Abnormality ........................................................................206
5.15 Combination Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)...207
5.16 Capacity Setting Abnormality ...............................................................208
5.18 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error ..................................................210
5.19 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality ..........................................215
5.20 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality....................................................216
5.21 Current Leakage Detection ..................................................................217
5.22 Missing of Leakage Detection Core .....................................................218
5.23 Activation of High Pressure Switch ......................................................219
iii Table of Contents

SiAF341904E
5.24 Activation of Low Pressure Sensor ......................................................221

5.25 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock..........................................................223
5.26 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality ...........................................................225
5.27 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality.......................................228
5.28 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................229
5.29 Wet Alarm.............................................................................................231
5.30 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................233
5.31 Harness Abnormality (between Outdoor Unit Main PCB and
Inverter PCB)........................................................................................234
5.32 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality.............................................................235
5.34 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................238
5.35 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................239
5.36 Inverter PCB Abnormality.....................................................................240
5.37 Momentary Power Failure during Test Operation ................................242
5.38 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................243
5.39 Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent ..............................................245
5.40 Compressor Overcurrent......................................................................247
5.41 Compressor Startup Abnormality .........................................................249
5.42 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and
Outdoor Unit Main PCB........................................................................252
5.43 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance ........................................................254
5.44 Reactor Temperature Abnormality .......................................................256
5.45 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality .................................257
5.46 Field Setting after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality
or Combination of PCB Abnormality.....................................................259
5.47 Refrigerant Shortage Warning..............................................................260
5.48 Open Phase .........................................................................................262
5.49 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality .....................263
5.50 Check Operation Not Executed............................................................265
5.51 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units..............266
5.52 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit.........269
5.53 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units .........................................270
5.54 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote Controllers .........275
5.55 Other Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit Abnormality................................276
5.56 Improper Combination of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit,
Indoor Unit and Remote Controller.......................................................277
5.57 Address Duplication of Centralized Controller......................................280
5.58 Transmission Error between Centralized Controller and Indoor Unit ...281
5.59 System Not Set Yet ..............................................................................284
5.60 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address Undefined .............285
6. Check ..................................................................................................287
6.1 High Pressure Check ...........................................................................287
6.2 Low Pressure Check ............................................................................288
6.3 Superheat Operation Check.................................................................289
6.4 Power Transistor Check .......................................................................290
6.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check.............................................................292
6.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check.................................................................293
6.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure ..............................................294
6.8 Thermistor Check .................................................................................295
6.9 Pressure Sensor Check .......................................................................298
6.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires ................................................299
Table of Contents iv
SiAF341904E
6.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable) ............................301

6.12 Fan Motor Connector Check (Signal Cable) ........................................302
6.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check ...............................................303
Part 7 Appendix .......................................................................... 306

1. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................307
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................307
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit ...................................................................................310
v Table of Contents
SiAF341904E
Introduction
1. Safety Cautions.......................................................................................2
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers.............................2
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users.................................4
2. Icons Used ..............................................................................................6
3. Revision History ......................................................................................7
Introduction 1
Safety Cautions SiAF341904E
1. Safety Cautions
Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.
After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the
equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the
customer.
This manual is for the
person in charge of
maintenance and
inspection.
Caution Items The caution items are classified into Warning and Caution. The Warning items are
especially important since death or serious injury can result if they are not followed closely. The
Caution items can also lead to serious accidents under some conditions if they are not
followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items described below.
Pictograms This symbol indicates an item for which caution must be exercised.
The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.
This symbol indicates a prohibited action.
The prohibited item or action is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
This symbol indicates an action that must be taken, or an instruction.
The instruction is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Warning
Do not store equipment in a room with fire sources (e.g., naked
flames, gas appliances, electric heaters).
Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the socket before

disassembling equipment for repair.
Working on equipment that is connected to the power supply may cause
an electrical shock.
If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or
inspect the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the
equipment.
If refrigerant gas is discharged during repair work, do not touch the
discharged refrigerant gas.
Refrigerant gas may cause frostbite.
When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the

compressor at the welded section, evacuate the refrigerant gas
completely at a well-ventilated place first.
If there is gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or
refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it
may cause injury.
If refrigerant gas leaks during repair work, ventilate the area.
Refrigerant gas may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.
Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting

repair work.
The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical
components of the outdoor unit.
A charged capacitor may cause an electrical shock.
2 Introduction
SiAF341904E Safety Cautions
Warning
Do not turn the air conditioner on or off by plugging in or
unplugging the power cable.
Plugging in or unplugging the power cable to operate the equipment may
cause an electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when

working in a high place (more than 2 m).
Insufficient safety measures may cause a fall.
In case of R-32 / R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes,

flare nuts and tools intended for the exclusive use with the R-32 / R-
410A refrigerant.
The use of materials for R-22 refrigerant models may cause a serious
accident, such as a damage of refrigerant cycle or equipment failure.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-32 / R-
410A / R-22) in the refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerant system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
Caution
Do not repair electrical components with wet hands.
Working on the equipment with wet hands may cause an electrical shock.
Do not clean the air conditioner with water.

Washing the unit with water may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to provide an earth / grounding when repairing the

equipment in a humid or wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.
Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable
when cleaning the equipment.
The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and may cause injury.
Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

The use of inappropriate tools may cause injury.
Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled

down enough before conducting repair work.
Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot may cause
burns.
Conduct welding work in a well-ventilated place.

Using the welder in an enclosed room may cause oxygen deficiency.
Introduction 3
Safety Cautions SiAF341904E
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Warning
Do not store the equipment in a room with fire sources (e.g., naked
flames, gas appliances, electric heaters).
Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable
model and appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt
to modify the equipment.
The use of inappropriate parts or tools may cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
If the power cable and lead wires are scratched or have deteriorated,
be sure to replace them.
Damaged cable and wires may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat
generation or fire.
Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the

same power outlet with other electrical appliances, since it may
cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and

follow the local technical standards related to the electrical
equipment, the internal wiring regulations, and the instruction
manual for installation when conducting electrical work.
Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work may cause
an electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to use the specified cable for wiring between the indoor and
outdoor units.
Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there
is no force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.
Improper connections may cause excessive heat generation or fire.
When wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure that
the terminal cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.
If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section may
cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Do not damage or modify the power cable.

Damaged or modified power cables may cause an electrical shock or fire.
Placing heavy items on the power cable, or heating or pulling the power
cable may damage it.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-32 / R-
410A / R-22) in the refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerant system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leaking point and
repair it before charging the refrigerant. After charging the
refrigerant, make sure that there is no leak.
If the leaking point cannot be located and the repair work must be
stopped, be sure to pump-down, and close the service valve, to prevent
refrigerant gas from leaking into the room. Refrigerant gas itself is
harmless, but it may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames, such
as those from fan type and other heaters, stoves and ranges.
When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation
site has sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the
equipment.
If the installation site does not have sufficient strength or the installation
work is not conducted securely, the equipment may fall and cause injury.
4 Introduction
SiAF341904E Safety Cautions
Warning
Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose,
then insert the plug into a power outlet securely.
If the plug is dusty or has a loose connection, it may cause an electrical
shock or fire.
When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to

dispose of the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.
If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.
Caution
Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases
depending on the conditions of the installation site, to prevent
electrical shocks.
Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

combustible gas leaks.
If combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it may cause a fire.
Check to see if parts and wires are mounted and connected

properly, and if connections at the soldered or crimped terminals
are secure.
Improper installation and connections may cause excessive heat
generation, fire or an electrical shock.
If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.
A corroded installation platform or frame may cause the unit to fall,
resulting in injury.
Check the earth / grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not

properly earthed / grounded.
Improper earth / grounding may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to measure insulation resistance after the repair, and make

sure that the resistance is 1 M or higher.
Faulty insulation may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair.
Faulty drainage may cause water to enter the room and wet the furniture
and floor.
Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

The water inside the unit may spill and wet the furniture and floor.
Introduction 5
Icons Used SiAF341904E
2. Icons Used
The following icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information.
Icon Type of Description
Information
Warning Warning is used when there is danger of personal injury.
Warning
Caution Caution is used when there is danger that the reader,
Caution through incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment,
lose data, get an unexpected result or have to restart (part
of) a procedure.
Note Note provides information that is not indispensable, but
Note may nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips
and tricks.
Reference Reference guides the reader to other places in this binder
Reference or in this manual, where he/she will find additional
information on a specific topic.
6 Introduction
SiAF341904E Revision History
3. Revision History
Month / Year Version Revised contents
04 / 2019 SiAF341904E First edition
Introduction 7
SiAF341904E
Part 1
General Information
1. Model Names ..........................................................................................9

1.1 Indoor Unit................................................................................................9
1.2 Outdoor Unit .............................................................................................9
2. External Appearance.............................................................................10
2.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................10
2.2 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................11
3. Combination of Outdoor Units...............................................................13
4. Capacity Range.....................................................................................15
4.1 Capacity Range for VRV Indoor Units Only ...........................................15
5. Specifications ........................................................................................18
8 Part 1 General Information

SiAF341904E Model Names
1. Model Names
1.1 Indoor Unit
VRV Indoor Unit
Capacity range kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 7.1 9.0 11.2 14.0 16.0
Power
HP 0.8 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6 supply,
Standard
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 80 100 125 140
Ceiling mounted cassette
FXFSQ ― 25AR 32AR 40AR 50AR 63AR 80AR 100AR 125AR 140AR
(Round flow with sensing) type
V1
Ceiling mounted duct type ― ― ― 40PB 50PB 63PB 80PB 100PB 125PB 140PB
FXMQ
― ― ― 40AR 50AR 63AR 80AR 100AR ― ―
Wall mounted type 20P 25P 32P ― ― ― ― ― ― ― VE
FXAQ
― ― ― 40P 50P 63P ― ― ― ― VER1
Power supply and standard symbols
V1: 1 phase, 230 V, 50/60 Hz (for Africa)
VE, VER1: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
1.2 Outdoor Unit

VRV X Series High-COP Type
Series Power
Model name
supply
Outdoor units 12AHR 14AHR 16AHR 18AHR 20AHR 22AHR 24AHR 26AHR 28AHR
RXQ Y1
30AHR 32AHR 34AHR 36AHR 38AHR 40AHR 42AHR 44AHR ―
Y1: 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50/60 Hz (for Africa)
VRV X Series Standard Type

Series Model name Power
supply
Outdoor units 6AR 8AR 10AR 12AR 14AR 16AR 18AR 20AR 22ANR 24ANR
RXQ 26ANR 28ANR 30ANR 32ANR 34ANR 36ANR 38ANR 40ANR 42ANR 44ANR Y1
46ANR 48ANR 50ANR 52ANR 54ANR 56ANR 58ANR 60ANR ― ―
Y1: 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50/60 Hz (for Africa)
Part 1 General Information 9

External Appearance SiAF341904E
2. External Appearance
2.1 Indoor Unit
VRV Indoor Unit
Ceiling mounted cassette (Round flow with sensing) type Wall mounted type
FXFSQ-AR FXAQ-P
Ceiling mounted duct type

FXMQ-PB
FXMQ-AR
―

SiAF341904E External Appearance
2.2 Outdoor Unit

12, 14, 16, 18, 20 HP 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34 HP
RXQ22AHRY1
RXQ12AHRY1 RXQ24AHRY1
RXQ34AHRY1
36, 38 HP 40 HP
RXQ38AHRY1
42, 44 HP
RXQ42AHRY1
RXQ44AHRY1

External Appearance SiAF341904E
6, 8, 10, 12 HP 14, 16, 18, 20 HP
RXQ6ARY1 RXQ14ARY1
RXQ8ARY1 RXQ16ARY1
RXQ10ARY1 RXQ18ARY1
RXQ12ARY1 RXQ20ARY1
22, 24 HP 26, 28, 30 HP 32, 34, 36, 38, 40 HP
RXQ22ANRY1 RXQ26ANRY1 RXQ32ANRY1

RXQ24ANRY1 RXQ28ANRY1 RXQ34ANRY1
RXQ30ANRY1 RXQ36ANRY1
RXQ38ANRY1
RXQ40ANRY1
42, 44 HP 46, 48, 50, 52, 54, 56, 58, 60 HP
RXQ50ANRY1
RXQ52ANRY1
RXQ54ANRY1
RXQ56ANRY1
RXQ58ANRY1
RXQ60ANRY1

SiAF341904E Combination of Outdoor Units
3. Combination of Outdoor Units

Capacity range 12 HP 14 HP 16 HP 18 HP 20 HP 22 HP 24 HP 26 HP
Model name RXQ12AHR RXQ14AHR RXQ16AHR RXQ18AHR RXQ20AHR RXQ22AHR RXQ24AHR RXQ26AHR
Outdoor unit 1 RXQ6AR RXQ6AR RXQ8AR RXQ8AR RXQ10AR RXQ6AR RXQ8AR RXQ8AR
Outdoor unit 3 — — — — — RXQ8AR RXQ8AR RXQ10AR
Model name RXQ28AHR RXQ30AHR RXQ32AHR RXQ34AHR RXQ36AHR RXQ38AHR RXQ40AHR RXQ42AHR
Capacity range 44 HP
Model name RXQ44AHR
Outdoor unit 1 RXQ14AR
System capacity Number Module Outdoor unit multi

kW HP of units 6 8 10 12 14 16 connection piping kit 1
32.0 12 2 ●●
38.4 14 2 ● ●
44.8 16 2 ●● BHFP22P1006
50.4 18 2 ● ●
56.0 20 2 ●●
60.8 22 3 ● ●●
67.2 24 3 ●●●
72.8 26 3 ●● ●
78.3 28 3 ●● ●
83.9 30 3 ● ● ●
89.4 32 3 ● ●●
BHFP22P1516
95.0 34 3 ● ●●
101.5 36 3 ● ● ●
107 38 3 ●● ●
113.5 40 3 ● ●●
120 42 3 ●●●
125 44 3 ●● ●
Note: 1. For multiple connection, the outdoor unit multi connection piping kit (separately sold) is required.

Combination of Outdoor Units SiAF341904E

Model name RXQ6AR RXQ8AR RXQ10AR RXQ12AR RXQ14AR RXQ16AR RXQ18AR RXQ20AR
Model name RXQ22ANR RXQ24ANR RXQ26ANR RXQ28ANR RXQ30ANR RXQ32ANR RXQ34ANR RXQ36ANR
Outdoor unit 3 – – – – – – – –
Model name RXQ38ANR RXQ40ANR RXQ42ANR RXQ44ANR RXQ46ANR RXQ48ANR RXQ50ANR RXQ52ANR
Outdoor unit 3 – – RXQ18AR RXQ20AR RXQ18AR RXQ18AR RXQ18AR RXQ18AR
Capacity range 54 HP 56 HP 58 HP 60 HP
Model name RXQ54ANR RXQ56ANR RXQ58ANR RXQ60ANR
Outdoor unit 1 RXQ18AR RXQ18AR RXQ18AR RXQ20AR
System capacity Number Module Outdoor unit multi

kW HP of units 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 connection piping kit 1
16.0 6 1 ●
22.4 8 1 ●
28.0 10 1 ●
33.5 12 1 ●
—
40.0 14 1 ●
45.0 16 1 ●
50.0 18 1 ●
56.0 20 1 ●
61.5 22 2 ● ●
67.0 24 2 ●●
73.5 26 2 ● ●
78.5 28 2 ● ●
83.5 30 2 ● ●
BHFP22P1006
90.0 32 2 ● ●
95.0 34 2 ● ●
100 36 2 ●●
106 38 2 ● ●
112 40 2 ●●
117 42 3 ●● ●
123 44 3 ●● ●
130 46 3 ●● ●
135 48 3 ● ● ●
140 50 3 ● ●●
BHFP22P1516
145 52 3 ● ●●
150 54 3 ●●●
156 56 3 ●● ●
162 58 3 ● ●●
168 60 3 ●●●
Note: 1. For multiple connection, the outdoor unit multi connection piping kit (separately sold) is required.

SiAF341904E Capacity Range
4. Capacity Range
4.1 Capacity Range for VRV Indoor Units Only
4.1.1 Connection Ratio
Total capacity index of the indoor units
Connection ratio =
Capacity index of the outdoor units
Max. connection ratio

Min.
Type connection Including Other
FXMQ-PB
ratio FXFSQ25AR indoor unit
FXAQ-P
at least one unit models
Single outdoor unit 200%
Double outdoor units 50% 200% 130% 160%
Triple outdoor units 130%

Capacity Range SiAF341904E
4.1.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations

Total capacity index of Maximum number of
Capacity
kW HP Model name Combination connectable indoor units connectable indoor units
index
1 1
32.0 12 300 RXQ12AHR RXQ6AR × 2 150 to 390 (480) 19 (24)
38.4 14 350 RXQ14AHR RXQ6AR + RXQ8AR 175 to 455 (560) 22 (28)
44.8 16 400 RXQ16AHR RXQ8AR × 2 200 to 520 (640) 26 (32)
50.4 18 450 RXQ18AHR RXQ8AR + RXQ10AR 225 to 585 (720) 29 (36)
56.0 20 500 RXQ20AHR RXQ10AR × 2 250 to 650 (800) 32 (40)
60.8 22 550 RXQ22AHR RXQ6AR + RXQ8AR × 2 275 to 715 (715) 35 (35)
67.2 24 600 RXQ24AHR RXQ8AR × 3 300 to 780 (780) 39 (39)
72.8 26 650 RXQ26AHR RXQ8AR × 2 + RXQ10AR 325 to 845 (845) 42 (42)
78.3 28 700 RXQ28AHR RXQ8AR × 2 + RXQ12AR 350 to 910 (910) 45 (45)
RXQ8AR + RXQ10AR +
83.9 30 750 RXQ30AHR 375 to 975 (975) 48 (48)
RXQ12AR
89.4 32 800 RXQ32AHR RXQ8AR + RXQ12AR × 2 400 to 1,040 (1,040) 52 (52)
95.0 34 850 RXQ34AHR RXQ10AR + RXQ12AR × 2 425 to 1,105 (1,105) 55 (55)
RXQ10AR + RXQ12AR +
101.5 36 900 RXQ36AHR 450 to 1,170 (1,170) 58 (58)
RXQ14AR
107 38 950 RXQ38AHR RXQ12AR × 2 + RXQ14AR 475 to 1,235 (1,235) 61 (61)
113.5 40 1,000 RXQ40AHR RXQ12AR + RXQ14AR × 2 500 to 1,300 (1,300)
120 42 1,050 RXQ42AHR RXQ14AR × 3 525 to 1,365 (1,365) 64 (64)
125 44 1,100 RXQ44AHR RXQ14AR × 2 + RXQ16AR 550 to 1,430 (1,430)
Notes:
1. Values inside brackets are based on connection of indoor units rated at maximum capacity,
160% for double outdoor units, and 130% for triple outdoor units.

SiAF341904E Capacity Range

Total capacity index of Maximum number of
Capacity
kW HP index Model name Combination connectable indoor units connectable indoor units
1 1
16.0 6 150 RXQ6AR RXQ6AR 75 to 195 (300) 9 (15)
22.4 8 200 RXQ8AR RXQ8AR 100 to 260 (400) 13 (20)
28.0 10 250 RXQ10AR RXQ10AR 125 to 325 (500) 16 (25)
33.5 12 300 RXQ12AR RXQ12AR 150 to 390 (600) 19 (30)
40.0 14 350 RXQ14AR RXQ14AR 175 to 455 (700) 22 (35)
45.0 16 400 RXQ16AR RXQ16AR 200 to 520 (800) 26 (40)
50.0 18 450 RXQ18AR RXQ18AR 225 to 585 (900) 29 (45)
56.0 20 500 RXQ20AR RXQ20AR 250 to 650 (1,000) 32 (50)
61.5 22 550 RXQ22ANR RXQ10AR + RXQ12AR 275 to 715 (880) 35 (44)
67.0 24 600 RXQ24ANR RXQ12AR × 2 300 to 780 (960) 39 (48)
73.5 26 650 RXQ26ANR RXQ12AR + RXQ14AR 325 to 845 (1,040) 42 (52)
90.0 32 800 RXQ32ANR RXQ14AR + RXQ18AR 400 to 1,040 (1,280) 52 (64)
95.0 34 850 RXQ34ANR RXQ16AR + RXQ18AR 425 to 1,105 (1,360) 55 (64)
100 36 900 RXQ36ANR RXQ18AR × 2 450 to 1,170 (1,440) 58 (64)
106 38 950 RXQ38ANR RXQ18AR + RXQ20AR 475 to 1,235 (1,520) 61 (64)
112 40 1,000 RXQ40ANR RXQ20AR × 2 500 to 1,300 (1,600)
117 42 1,050 RXQ42ANR RXQ12AR × 2 + RXQ18AR 525 to 1,365 (1,365)
RXQ14AR + RXQ16AR +
135 48 1,200 RXQ48ANR 600 to 1,560 (1,560)
RXQ18AR
140 50 1,250 RXQ50ANR RXQ14AR + RXQ18AR × 2 625 to 1,625 (1,625) 64 (64)
145 52 1,300 RXQ52ANR RXQ16AR + RXQ18AR × 2 650 to 1,690 (1,690)

150 54 1,350 RXQ54ANR RXQ18AR × 3 675 to 1,755 (1,755)
162 58 1,450 RXQ58ANR RXQ18AR + RXQ20AR × 2 725 to 1,885 (1,885)
168 60 1,500 RXQ60ANR RXQ20AR × 3 750 to 1,950 (1,950)
Notes:
1. Values inside brackets are based on connection of indoor units rated at maximum capacity,
200% for single outdoor units, 160% for double outdoor units, and 130% for triple outdoor units.

Specifications SiAF341904E
5. Specifications
Model Name (Combination Unit) RXQ12AHRY1 RXQ14AHRY1
Model Name (Independent Unit) RXQ6ARY1+RXQ6ARY1 RXQ6ARY1+RXQ8ARY1
Power supply 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50/60 Hz 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50/60 Hz
1 Cooling capacity kcal/h 27,500 33,000
Btu/h 109,000 131,000
kW 32 38.4
Casing color Ivory white (5Y7.5/1) Ivory white (5Y7.5/1)
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765)
Heat exchanger Cross fin coil Cross fin coil
Compressor Type Hermetically sealed scroll type Hermetically sealed scroll type
Motor output ×
kW (2.3×1)+(2.3×1) (2.3×1)+(3.4×1)
Number of units
Starting method Soft start Soft start
Fan Type Propeller fan Propeller fan
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.55×1) (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)
Airflow rate m³/min 119+119 119+178
Drive Direct drive Direct drive
Connecting Liquid pipe mm 12.7 C1220T (Brazing connection) 12.7 C1220T (Brazing connection)
pipes Gas pipe mm 28.6 C1220T (Brazing connection) 28.6 C1220T (Brazing connection)
Mass kg 165+165 165+165
2 Sound pressure level dB(A) 59 59
Safety devices High pressure switch, Fan driver overload protector, High pressure switch, Fan driver overload protector,
Over current relay, Inverter overload protector, Over current relay, Inverter overload protector,
Over/under voltage protection printed circuit board Over/under voltage protection printed circuit board
Capacity control % 25-100 20-100
Refrigerant Refrigerant name R-410A R-410A
Charge kg 5.9+5.9 5.9+5.9
Control Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Refrigerator oil Refer to the nameplate of compressor Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Standard accessories Installation manual, Operation manual, Installation manual, Operation manual,
Connection pipes, Clamps Connection pipes, Clamps
Drawing No. Specifications ― ―
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
1. Indoor temp.: 27°CDB, 19°CWB / outdoor temp.: 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5 m, level difference: 0 m. Conversion formulae
2. Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1 m in front of the unit at a height of 1.5 m.
kcal/h = kW × 860
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions. Btu/h = kW × 3412

SiAF341904E Specifications

Btu/h 153,000 172,000
kW 44.8 50.4
Motor output ×
kW (3.4×1)+(3.4×1) (3.4×1)+(4.5×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.55×1) (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)
Mass kg 165+165 165+175
Charge kg 5.9+5.9 5.9+6.7
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860


Model Name (Independent Unit) RXQ10ARY1+RXQ10ARY1 RXQ6ARY1+RXQ8ARY1+RXQ8ARY1
Btu/h 191,000 207,000
kW 56 60.8
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765)
mm (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765)
+(1,657×930×765)
Motor output × kW (4.5×1)+(4.5×1) (2.3×1)+(3.4×1)+(3.4×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.55×1) (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.55×1)
Airflow rate m³/min 178+178 119+178+178
Mass kg 175+175 165+165+165
Charge kg 6.7+6.7 5.9+5.9+5.9
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Btu/h = kW × 3412


Model Name (Independent Unit) RXQ8ARY1+RXQ8ARY1+RXQ8ARY1 RXQ8ARY1+RXQ8ARY1+RXQ10ARY1
Btu/h 229,000 248,000
kW 67.2 72.8
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765)
mm
+(1,657×930×765) +(1,657×930×765)
Motor output × kW (3.4×1)+(3.4×1)+(3.4×1) (3.4×1)+(3.4×1)+(4.5×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.55×1) (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.55×1)
Airflow rate m³/min 178+178+178 178+178+178
Mass kg 165+165+165 165+165+175
Charge kg 5.9+5.9+5.9 5.9+5.9+6.7
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412


Btu/h 267,000 286,000
kW 78.3 83.9
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765)
mm
+(1,657×930×765) +(1,657×930×765)
Motor output × kW (3.4×1)+(3.4×1)+(5.6×1) (3.4×1)+(4.5×1)+(5.6×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.55×1) (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.55×1)
Mass kg 165+165+175 165+175+175
Charge kg 5.9+5.9+6.8 5.9+6.7+6.8
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412


Btu/h 305,000 324,000
kW 89.4 95
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765)
mm
+(1,657×930×765) +(1,657×930×765)
Motor output × kW (3.4×1)+(5.6×1)+(5.6×1) (4.5×1)+(5.6×1)+(5.6×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.55×1) (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.55×1)
Mass kg 165+175+175 175+175+175
Charge kg 5.9+6.8+6.8 6.7+6.8+6.8
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412


Btu/h 346,000 365,000
kW 101.5 107
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765)
mm
+(1,657×1,240×765) +(1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output × kW (4.5×1)+(5.6×1)+(6.4×1) (5.6×1)+(5.6×1)+(6.4×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.75×2) (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 175+175+220 175+175+220
Charge kg 6.7+6.8+7.4 6.8+6.8+7.4
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412


Btu/h 387,000 409,000
kW 113.5 120
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×1,240×765) (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)
mm
+(1,657×1,240×765) +(1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output × kW (5.6×1)+(6.4×1)+(6.4×1) (6.4×1)+(6.4×1)+(6.4×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2) (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 175+220+220 220+220+220
Charge kg 6.8+7.4+7.4 7.4+7.4+7.4
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412

Model Name (Combination Unit) RXQ44AHRY1

Model Name (Independent Unit) RXQ14ARY1+RXQ14ARY1+RXQ16ARY1
Power supply 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50/60 Hz
1 Cooling capacity kcal/h 108,000
Btu/h 427,000
kW 125
Casing color Ivory white (5Y7.5/1)
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)
Heat exchanger Cross fin coil
Compressor Type Hermetically sealed scroll type
Motor output ×
kW (6.4×1)+(6.4×1)+(3.5×1)+(3.5×1)
Number of units
Starting method Soft start
Fan Type Propeller fan
Motor output kW (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2)
Airflow rate m³/min 257+257+257
Drive Direct drive
Connecting Liquid pipe mm 19.1 C1220T (Brazing connection)
pipes Gas pipe mm 41.3 C1220T (Brazing connection)
Mass kg 220+220+260
2 Sound pressure level dB(A) 65
Safety devices High pressure switch, Fan driver overload protector, Over current relay, Inverter overload protector,
Over/under voltage protection printed circuit board
Capacity control % 10-100
Refrigerant Refrigerant name R-410A
Charge kg 7.4+7.4+8.2
Control Electronic expansion valve
Refrigerator oil Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Standard accessories Installation manual, Operation manual, Connection pipes, Clamps
Drawing No. Specifications ―
Sound level ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412


Model Name RXQ6ARY1 RXQ8ARY1
Btu/h 54,600 76,400
kW 16.0 22.4
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,657×930×765 1,657×930×765
Motor output ×
kW 2.3×1 3.4×1
Number of units
Motor output kW 0.55×1 0.55×1
Airflow rate m³/min 119 178
Mass kg 165 165
Charge kg 5.9 5.9
Drawing No. Specifications 3D120745 3D120745
Sound level 4D112438A 4D112439A
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860


Btu/h 95,500 114,000
kW 28.0 33.5
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,657×930×765 1,657×930×765
Motor output ×
kW 4.5×1 5.6×1
Number of units
Mass kg 175 175
Charge kg 6.7 6.8
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860


Btu/h 136,000 154,000
kW 40.0 45.0
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,657×1,240×765 1,657×1,240×765
Motor output ×
kW 6.4×1 (3.5×1)+(3.5×1)
Number of units
Mass kg 220 260
Charge kg 7.4 8.2
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860


Btu/h 171,000 191,000
kW 50.0 56.0
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,657×1,240×765 1,657×1,240×765
Motor output ×
kW (4.0×1)+(4.0×1) (3.8×1)+(6.3×1)
Number of units
Mass kg 260 285
Charge kg 8.4 11.8
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860

Model Name (Combination Unit) RXQ22ANRY1 RXQ24ANRY1

Btu/h 210,000 229,000
kW 61.5 67.0
Motor output ×
kW (4.5×1)+(5.6×1) (5.6×1)+(5.6×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.55×1) (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)
Mass kg 175+175 175+175
Charge kg 6.7+6.8 6.8+6.8
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860


Btu/h 251,000 268,000
kW 73.5 78.5
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×1,240×765) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output ×
kW (5.6×1)+(6.4×1) (5.6×1)+(3.5×1)+(3.5×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.75×2) (0.55×1)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 175+220 175+260
Charge kg 6.8+7.4 6.8+8.2
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860


Btu/h 285,000 307,000
kW 83.5 90.0
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×1,240×765) (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output ×
kW (5.6×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1) (6.4×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.75×2) (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 175+260 220+260
Charge kg 6.8+8.4 7.4+8.4
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860


Btu/h 324,000 341,000
kW 95.0 100
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765) (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output ×
kW (3.5×1)+(3.5×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1) (4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.75×2)+(0.75×2) (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 260+260 260+260
Charge kg 8.2+8.4 8.4+8.4
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860


Btu/h 362,000 382,000
kW 106 112
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765) (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output ×
kW (4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+(3.8×1)+(6.3×1) (3.8×1)+(6.3×1)+(3.8×1)+(6.3×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.75×2)+(0.75×2) (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 260+285 285+285
Charge kg 8.4+11.8 11.8+11.8
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860


Btu/h 399,000 420,000
kW 117 123
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765)+ (1,657×930×765)+(1,657×930×765)+
mm
(1,657×1,240×765) (1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output × kW (5.6×1)+(5.6×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1) (5.6×1)+(5.6×1)+(3.8×1)+(6.3×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.75×2) (0.55×1)+(0.55×1)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 175+175+260 175+175+285
Charge kg 6.8+6.8+8.4 6.8+6.8+11.8
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412


Btu/h 444,000 461,000
kW 130 135
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)+ (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)+
mm
(1,657×1,240×765) (1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output × kW (6.4×1)+(6.4×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1) (6.4×1)+(3.5×1)+(3.5×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2) (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 220+220+260 220+260+260
Charge kg 7.4+7.4+8.4 7.4+8.2+8.4
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412


Btu/h 478,000 495,000
kW 140 145
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)+ (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)+
mm
(1,657×1,240×765) (1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output × kW (6.4×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1) (3.5×1)+(3.5×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+
Number of units (4.0×1)+(4.0×1)
Motor output kW (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2) (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 220+260+260 260+260+260
Charge kg 7.4+8.4+8.4 8.2+8.4+8.4
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412


Btu/h 512,000 532,000
kW 150 156
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)+ (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)+
mm
(1,657×1,240×765) (1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output × kW (4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+ (4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+
Number of units (4.0×1)+(4.0×1) (3.8×1)+(6.3×1)
Motor output kW (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2) (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 260+260+260 260+260+285
Charge kg 8.4+8.4+8.4 8.4+8.4+11.8
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412


Btu/h 553,000 573,000
kW 162 168
Dimensions (H × W × D) (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)+ (1,657×1,240×765)+(1,657×1,240×765)+
mm
(1,657×1,240×765) (1,657×1,240×765)
Motor output × kW (4.0×1)+(4.0×1)+(3.8×1)+(6.3×1)+ (3.8×1)+(6.3×1)+(3.8×1)+(6.3×1)+
Number of units (3.8×1)+(6.3×1) (3.8×1)+(6.3×1)
Motor output kW (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2) (0.75×2)+(0.75×2)+(0.75×2)
Mass kg 260+285+285 285+285+285
Charge kg 8.4+11.8+11.8 11.8+11.8+11.8
Sound level ― ―
Notes:
kcal/h = kW × 860
Btu/h = kW × 3412

SiAF341904E
Part 2
Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) ...................................................42

1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................42
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................46
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................47
2.1 RXQ6/8/10/12A ......................................................................................47
2.2 RXQ14/16/18/20A ..................................................................................48
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................49
3.1 RXQ6/8/10/12/14A .................................................................................49
3.2 RXQ16/18/20A .......................................................................................51
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit 41

Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) SiAF341904E
1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)

1.1 Outdoor Unit
1.1.1 RXQ6/8/10/12/14A
No. in
Electric
piping Name Function
symbol
diagram
(1) M1C Inverter compressor Inverter compressor is operated in multi-steps according to Te.
(2) M1F Inverter fan The fan rotation speed is varied by using inverter.
Inverter fan
(3) M2F (RXQ14A only)
Electronic expansion PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of subcooling heat
(4) Y2E
valve (Injection) exchanger constant.
Electronic expansion Used to control refrigerant charging speed during refrigerant auto charge
(5) Y4E valve (Refrigerant auto operation and to stop refrigerant charge automatically.
charge)
Solenoid valve Used to control the amount of oil from the oil separator to the compressor.
(6) Y3S
(Oil return 1)
(7) S1NPH High pressure sensor Used to detect high pressure.
(8) S1NPL Low pressure sensor Used to detect low pressure.
High pressure switch In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when an error occurs, this switch
(9) S1PH (For M1C compressor) is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor
operation.
Pressure regulating valve This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa for prevention of pressure increase,
(10) — thus resulting in no damage of functional parts due to the increase of pressure in
transportation or storage.
Double tube heat Used to subcool liquid refrigerant.
(11) — exchanger (Subcooling
heat exchanger)
Capillary tube Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the
(12) —
compressor.
Thermistor Used to detect outdoor air temperature, correct discharge pipe temperature, and
(13) R1T
(Outdoor air: Ta) others.
Thermistor Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection
(14) R21T
(Discharge pipe: Tdi1) control of compressor, and others.
Thermistor Used to detect suction pipe temperature, and for other purposes.
(15) R3T
(Suction pipe: Ts)
Thermistor (Heat This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the air heat exchanger and check
(16) R4T exchanger liquid pipe: Tf) valve. Used to make judgments on the recover or discharge refrigerants to the
refrigerant regulator.
Thermistor (Subcooling This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the double tube heat exchanger.
(17) R5T heat exchanger liquid
pipe: Tsc)
Thermistor (Subcooling This detects temperature of gas pipe on the evaporation side of subcooling heat
(18) R6T heat exchanger gas pipe: exchanger. Used to exercise the constant control of superheated degree at the
Tsh) outlet of subcooling heat exchanger.
(19) R8T Thermistor Detects compressor surface temperature, this switch is activated at surface
(Compressor body: Ti1) temperature of 120°C or more to stop the compressor operation.
42 Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit

Stop valve (With service port on on-site piping side φ 7.9mm flare connection)
SiAF341904E
(11)
Double tube
Heat Exchanger
R6T
(18) (16)
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit

R4T
Liquid Check valve
Pipe
R5T
(17) ONLY FOR
(2)
Filter RXQ14ARY1 FAN
M1F R1T
M (13)
Heat sink PCB Heat Exchanger
FAN
Electronic
Expansion M2F
Valve ONLY FOR M
(Y2E) RXQ14ARY1 (3)
(4) (7)
(S1NPH)
Pressure SENPH High pressure
Regulating sensor
Valve
(10) Check valve
(9) Filter
(5) (S1PH)
Electronic Expansion High pressure
Valve switch
Oil
(Y4E) HPS
Separator
Refrigerant
Auto charge (14) R21T
port Filter
Filter
(8) Compressor
(19) R8T
SV
(S1NPL) INV Solenoid valve (Y3S) (6)

Low pressure (1)
sensor
M1C
(15)
SENPL
R3T
Gas
Pipe Capillary tube
Filter
(12)
C: 3D112173B
Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)
43
1.1.2 RXQ16/18/20A
No. in Electric
piping Name Function
symbol
diagram
(1) M1C Inverter compressor Inverter compressor is operated in multi-steps according to Te.
(2) M2C
(3) M1F Inverter fan The fan rotation speed is varied by using inverter.
(4) M2F
Electronic expansion PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of subcooling heat
(5) Y2E
valve (Injection) exchanger constant.
Electronic expansion Used to control refrigerant charging speed during refrigerant auto charge
(6) Y4E valve (Refrigerant auto operation and to stop refrigerant charge automatically.
charge)
Solenoid valve Used to control the amount of oil from the oil separator to the compressor.
(7) Y3S (Oil return 1)
Solenoid valve
(8) Y4S
(Oil return 2)
(9) S1NPH High pressure sensor Used to detect high pressure.
(10) S1NPL Low pressure sensor Used to detect low pressure.
High pressure switch In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when an error occurs, this switch
(11) S1PH (For M1C compressor) is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor
operation.
High pressure switch
(12) S2PH
(For M2C compressor)
Pressure regulating valve This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa for prevention of pressure increase,
(13) — thus resulting in no damage of functional parts due to the increase of pressure in
transportation or storage.
Double tube heat Used to subcool liquid refrigerant.
(14) — exchanger (Subcooling
heat exchanger)
(15) — Capillary tube Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the
compressor.
(16) —
Thermistor Used to detect outdoor air temperature, correct discharge pipe temperature, and
(17) R1T (Outdoor air: Ta) others.
Thermistor Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection
(18) R21T (M1C discharge pipe: control of compressor, and others.
Tdi1)
Thermistor
(19) R22T (M2C discharge pipe:
Tdi2)
Thermistor (Suction pipe: Used to detect suction pipe temperature, and for other purposes.
(20) R3T
Ts)
Thermistor (Heat This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the air heat exchanger and check
(21) R4T exchanger liquid pipe: Tf) valve. Used to make judgements on the recover or discharge refrigerants to the
refrigerant regulator.
Thermistor (Subcooling This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the double tube heat exchanger.
(22) R5T heat exchanger liquid
pipe: Tsc)
Thermistor (Subcooling This detects temperature of gas pipe on the evaporation side of subcooling heat
(23) R6T heat exchanger gas pipe: exchanger. Used to exercise the constant control of superheated degree at the
Tsh) outlet of subcooling heat exchanger.
Thermistor Detects compressor surface temperature, this switch is activated at surface
(24) R8T (M1C Compressor body: temperature of 120°C or more to stop the compressor operation.
Ti1)
Thermistor
(25) R9T (M2C Compressor body:
Ti2)

Stop valve (With service port on on-site piping side φ 7.9mm flare connection)
SiAF341904E
(14)
Double tube
Heat Exchanger
R6T
(23) (21)
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit

R4T
Liquid
Pipe
R5T
(22) (3)
Filter (17)
FAN
R1T
M1F M
Heat sink PCB Heat Exchanger
Electronic
FAN
Expansion
Valve M2F M
(Y2E)
(4)
(5) (9)
(S1NPH)
SENPH High pressure
Pressure sensor
Regulating
Valve
(13)
Check Valve Check Valve
Filter Filter
(6) (12) (11)

Electronic Expansion
Oil
Oil
Valve (S2PH) (S1PH)

High pressure
Separator
Separator
High pressure
(Y4E) switch switch
Refrigerant HPS HPS
Auto charge
Filter Filter
port Filter
(19) R22T R21T (18)
Solenoid Solenoid
valve valve
sv
sv
(10) Compressor Compressor

(Y4S) (Y3S) R8T (24)
(S1NPL) (25) R9T INV2
(8) (15) (7) INV1
Low pressure M2C
sensor Capillary M1C
tube
(2) (1)
(20)
SENPL
Capillary
R3T tube
(16)
Gas
Pipe
Filter
C: 3D112176
Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)
45
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

No. in piping Name Electric Applicable model Function
diagram symbol
Electronic expansion valve All indoor units Used for gas superheated degree
(1) Y1E
control while in cooling.
(2) Suction air thermistor R1T All indoor units Used for thermostat control.
Indoor liquid pipe thermistor All indoor units Used for gas superheated degree
(3) R2T
Indoor gas pipe thermistor All indoor units Used for gas superheated degree
(4) R3T
 FXFSQ-AR  FXMQ-PB
Gas piping
connection port
(4)
(4)
Indoor heat exchanger

(2)
Fan
(3)
Liquid piping (3)
connection port (2)
(1)
Filter (1) Filter

C: 4D024460P
C: 4D110285
 FXMQ-AR  FXAQ-P
Gas piping
connection port
(4) (4)
Indoor heat exchanger
Fan
(3)
(2)
(3) Liquid piping
(2) connection port
(1)
Filter (1) Filter

C: 4D034245R
C: 4D097585B

SiAF341904E Functional Parts Layout
2. Functional Parts Layout

2.1 RXQ6/8/10/12A
Top View
Solenoid Valve
(Oil return 1)
(Y3S)
Electronic expansion
valve (Injection)
(Y2E)
Thermistor
(Subcooling heat
exchanger gas pipe)
(R6T)
Thermistor (Heat
Thermistor
exchanger liquid pipe)
(Subcooling heat
(R4T)
exchanger liquid pipe)
(R5T)
Front View
Inverter fan
(M1F)
High pressure sensor

(S1NPH)
Thermistor
High pressure (Discharge pipe)
switch (R21T)
(S1PH) Inverter
compressor
Thermistor (M1C)
(Outdoor air)
(R1T) Thermistor
(Compressor body)
(R8T)
Detail
Low pressure
sensor
(S1NPL)
Electronic expansion valve

(Refrigerant auto charge)
Thermistor
(Y4E)
(Suction pipe)
(R3T)
C: 1P503484B

Functional Parts Layout SiAF341904E
2.2 RXQ14/16/18/20A
Top View
Solenoid valve (Oil return 2)
(Y4S)
Solenoid valve (Oil return 1)
(Y3S)
Low pressure sensor

(S1NPL)
Electronic expansion
valve (Injection)
(Y2E)
Front View
Inverter fan
(M1F) Thermistor (Outdoor air)
(R1T)
Inverter fan
(M2F)

(For M2C compressor)
(S2PH)
High pressure sensor

(S1NPH) (For M1C compressor)
(S1PH)
Thermistor
(Subcooling heat
exchanger gas pipe)
(R6T) Thermistor Thermistor
(M2C (M1C
Discharge pipe) Discharge pipe)
(R22T) (R21T)
Inverter
compressor
Inverter
compressor (M1C)
Thermistor (Heat (M2C)
exchanger liquid pipe) Thermistor (M2C Thermistor (M1C
(R4T) Compressor body) Compressor body)
(R9T) (R8T)
Thermistor
(Subcooling heat
exchanger liquid pipe) Detail
(R5T)
Thermistor (Suction pipe) Electronic expansion valve (Refrigerant auto charge)

(R3T) (Y4E)
C: 1P504188C

SiAF341904E Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode

3.1 RXQ6/8/10/12/14A
Cooling Operation
High temperature, high pressure, gas
High temperature, high pressure, liquid
Low temperature, low pressure
Indoor unit operation
Fan ON Fan ON
ON Fan OFF OFF ON

Heat exchanger Heat exchanger Heat exchanger
Fan Fan Fan

EV: Normal
control EV: 0 pulse EV: 0 pulse
Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter
Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
Thermostat ON Thermostat OFF
Stop valve (With service port on on-site piping side φ7.9mm flare connection)
Double tube
Heat exchanger
R6T
Check valve R4T
R5T
ONLY FOR
M1F R1T
M
Heat exchanger
Heat sink PCB FAN
Electronic M2F
expansion ONLY FOR M
valve RXQ14ARY1
(Y2E)
(S1NPH)
SENPH High pressure
Pressure sensor
regulating
valve
Check valve
Filter
(S1PH)
Electronic expansion High pressure
Separator
valve switch
Oil
(Y4E) HPS
Refrigerant
Auto charge R21T
port Filter
Filter
(S1NPL) R8T Compressor

Low pressure Solenoid valve (Y3S)
SV
INV
sensor
M1C
SENPL
R3T
Capillary tube
Filter
C: 3D112173B

Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode SiAF341904E
Cooling Oil Return Operation

Fan ON Fan OFF Fan ON
ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan

EV: Normal EV: Normal
control EV: 224 pulse control

Double tube
Heat exchanger
R6T
Check valve R4T
R5T
ONLY FOR
M1F R1T
M
Heat exchanger
Heat sink PCB FAN
Electronic expansion M2F
valve ONLY FOR M
(Y2E) RXQ14ARY1
(S1NPH)
SENPH High pressure
Pressure sensor
regulating
valve
Check valve
Filter
(S1PH)
Electronic expansion High pressure
Separator
valve switch
Oil
(Y4E) HPS
Refrigerant
Auto charge R21T
port Filter Filter
(S1NPL) R8T Compressor

Low pressure Solenoid valve (Y3S)
SV
INV
sensor
M1C
SENPL
R3T
Capillary tube
Filter
C: 3D112173B

SiAF341904E Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
3.2 RXQ16/18/20A
Cooling Operation
Fan ON Fan ON
ON Fan OFF OFF ON

Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal
control EV: 0 pulse EV: 0 pulse

Double tube
Heat Exchanger
R6T
R4T
R5T
Filter FAN
R1T
M1F M
Electronic Heat sink PCB Heat Exchanger
Expansion FAN
Valve
(Y2E) M2F M
(S1NPH)
SENPH High pressure
Pressure sensor
Regulating
Valve
Filter Filter
Separator
Separator
Electronic Expansion (S2PH) (S1PH)

Oil
Oil
Valve High pressure

Refrigerant (Y4E) High pressure
switch switch
Auto charge HPS HPS
port Filter
Filter
Filter R22T R21T
Solenoid Solenoid
Compressor valve Compressor
sv
sv
valve
R9T (Y4S) (Y3S) R8T
(S1NPL) INV2 INV1
Low pressure M2C Capillary
sensor M1C
tube
SENPL
Capillary
R3T tube
Filter
C: 3D112176

Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode SiAF341904E
Cooling Oil Return Operation


Fan OFF
Fan ON Fan ON
ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal EV: Normal

control EV: 224 pulse control
Double tube
Heat Exchanger
R6T
R4T
R5T
Filter FAN
R1T
M1F M
Electronic Heat sink PCB Heat Exchanger
Expansion FAN
Valve
(Y2E) M2F M
(S1NPH)
SENPH High pressure
Pressure sensor
Regulating
Valve
Filter Filter
Separator
Separator
Electronic Expansion (S2PH) (S1PH)

Oil
Oil
Valve High pressure

Refrigerant (Y4E) High pressure
switch switch
Auto charge HPS HPS
port Filter
Filter
Filter R22T R21T
Solenoid Solenoid
Compressor valve Compressor
sv
sv
valve
R9T (Y4S) (Y3S) R8T
(S1NPL) INV2 INV1
Low pressure M2C Capillary
sensor M1C
tube
SENPL
Capillary
R3T tube
Filter
C: 3D112176

SiAF341904E
Part 3
Remote Controller
1. Applicable Models .................................................................................54

2. Names and Functions ...........................................................................56
2.1 BRC1E62 ...............................................................................................56
2.2 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................58
2.3 BRC4C, BRC7E Series ..........................................................................60
2.4 BRC4M151W16 .....................................................................................61
3. Main/Sub Setting...................................................................................64
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E62, BRC1E63) ..................................64
3.2 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together.............................65
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller...................................66
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting..................................................70
5.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63 .............................................................................70
5.2 BRC4C, BRC7E Series ..........................................................................72
5.3 Group No. Setting Example....................................................................72
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu..........................................73
6.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63 .............................................................................73
6.2 BRC4C, BRC7E Series ..........................................................................77
Part 3 Remote Controller 53

Applicable Models SiAF341904E
1. Applicable Models
Wired remote Wireless remote Wireless remote controller
Series controller controller (New type: 5-step airflow rate)
Navigation (Old type) Remote controller Receiver
FXFSQ-AR
BRC1E63 ― BRC7M632F-6
(1)
FXMQ-PB BRC4C66 BRC4M151W16
BRC1E63 BRC4M61-6
FXMQ-AR ―
BRC1E62
FXAQ-P BRC7EA619 BRC7M618-6
Note(s) 1. Some functions are not available depending on the remote controller. Refer to page 55 for
details.
54 Part 3 Remote Controller

SiAF341904E Applicable Models
Function list
FXFSQ-AR
Category Function
BRC1E63 BRC4M151
ON/OFF operation ● ●
Setting temperature ● ●
Swing pattern selection ● ●
Switchable fan speed (Ventilation amount) ● ●
Display switching function ● —
Basic performance Backlight function ● ●
Display automatic OFF ● —
Multilingual correspond ● ●
Timer function (Time schedule display) ● —
Key lock function ● —
Contrast adjustment ● —
Automatic eco airflow rate ● ●
Eco infrared floor temperature sensor ● —
Sensing sensor stop control ● —
Sensing sensor low mode ● —
Setpoint range set ● —
Setback ● —
Energy saving function
OFF timer (programmed) ● —
Weekly schedule timer ● —
ON/OFF timer — ●
Setting temperature automatic recovery ● —
VRTsmart control ● —
VRT control ● —
Active circulation airflow ● —
Forced cooling ON operation ● —
Independent up-and-down airflow ● —
Automatic direct air (when human sensing) ● —
Two selectable temperature sensors ● —
Comfortable function Application for high ceiling ● —
Service contact display ● —
Model name display (indoor/outdoor) ● —
Filter sign/reset ● ●
Operation time accumulation time display ● —
Operation data display ● —
●: Available
—: Not available

Names and Functions SiAF341904E
2. Names and Functions

2.1 BRC1E62
(1) Mode Selector button (6) Right button

Used to select the operation mode. Used to highlight the next items on the
right-hand side.
(2) Airflow Setting button Display contents are changed to next
Used to indicate the Airflow Rate (Air screen per page.
Volume / Fan Speed) / Airflow Direction
screen. (7) Left button
Used to highlight the next items on the
(3) Menu/Enter button left-hand side.
Used to indicate the Main menu. Display contents are changed to
(For details of Main menu, refer to the previous screen per page.
operation manual.)
Used to enter the selected item. (8) ON/OFF button
Press to start the system.
(4) Up button Press this button again to stop the
Used to increase the set temperature. system.
Used to highlight the item above the
current selection. (9) Operation lamp (Green)
(The highlighted items will be scrolled This lamp lights up during operation. The
through when the button is pressed lamp blinks if an error occurs.
continuously.)
Used to change the selected item. (10) Cancel button
Used to return to the previous screen.
(5) Down button Press and hold this button for 4
Used to decrease the set temperature. seconds or longer to display Service
Used to highlight the item below the Settings menu.
current selection.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled (11) LCD (with backlight)
through when the button is pressed The backlight will be lit for about 30
continuously.) seconds by pressing any button.
Used to change the selected item.

SiAF341904E Names and Functions
Main Menu
• Airflow direction
• Quick start
• Ventilation
• Energy saving options
• Schedule
• Filter auto clean
• Maintenance information
• Configuration
Main Menu screen • Current settings
• Clock & calendar
• Language
Press Press the Cancel
the Menu/Enter button once.
Basic Screen button once.
• Operation mode changeover
• Temperature setting
• Airflow rate
• Menu display
• Confirmation of each setting
• On
• Off
• Cancel
• Operation lamp
Press the Cancel button Press the Cancel

for 4 seconds or more. button once.
Basic screen
Press the Cancel

button once.
Press the Cancel button
for 4 seconds or more.
Service Settings screen Maintenance Menu screen
Service Settings Menu Maintenance Menu

• Test operation • Model name
• Maintenance Contract • Operation hours
• Field settings • Indoor unit status
• Min setpoints differential • Outdoor unit status
• Group address • Forced defrost
• Indoor unit AirNet address • Error display
• Outdoor unit AirNet address • Swap unit No.
• Error history • Addressed sensor value
• Indoor unit status
• Outdoor unit status
• Forced fan ON
• Switch main sub controller
• Filter indicator

2.2 BRC1E63
(1) Mode Selector button (6) Right button

Used to select the operation mode. Used to highlight the next items on the
right-hand side.
(2) Airflow Setting button Display contents are changed to next
Used to indicate the Airflow Rate (Air screen per page.
Volume / Fan Speed) / Airflow Direction
screen. (7) Left button
Used to highlight the next items on the
(3) Menu/Enter button left-hand side.
Used to indicate the Main menu. Display contents are changed to
(For details of Main menu, refer to the previous screen per page.
operation manual.)
Used to enter the selected item. (8) ON/OFF button
Press to start the system.
(4) Up button Press this button again to stop the
Used to increase the set temperature. system.
Used to highlight the item above the
current selection. (9) Operation lamp (Green)
(The highlighted items will be scrolled This lamp lights up during operation. The
through when the button is pressed lamp blinks if an error occurs.
continuously.)
Used to change the selected item. (10) Cancel button
Used to return to the previous screen.
(5) Down button Press and hold this button for 4
Used to decrease the set temperature. seconds or longer to display Service
Used to highlight the item below the Settings menu.
current selection.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled (11) LCD (with backlight)
through when the button is pressed The backlight will be lit for about 30
continuously.) seconds by pressing any button.
Used to change the selected item.

Main Menu
• Circulation airflow
• Individual air direction
• Quick start
• Ventilation
• Energy saving options
• Schedule
• Filter auto clean
Main Menu screen • Maintenance information
• Configuration
• Current settings
• Clock & Calendar
Press Press Cancel • Language
Menu/Enter button once.
button once.
Basic Screen
• Operation mode changeover
 The items on each menu vary
• Temperature setting
depending on the connected
• Airflow rate
models.
• Menu display
• Confirmation of each setting
• On
• Off
• Cancel Basic screen
• Operation lamp
Press Cancel button Press Cancel
for 4 seconds or more. button once.
Press Cancel
button once.
Press Cancel button
for 4 seconds or more.
Service Settings screen Maintenance Menu screen
Service Settings Menu Maintenance Menu

• Test Operation • Model name
• Maintenance contact • Operation hours
• Field settings • Indoor unit status
• Demand • Outdoor unit status
• Min setpoints differential • Forced defrost
• External input interlock • Error display
• Group address • Swap unit No.
• Indoor unit AirNet address • Addressed sensor value
• Outdoor unit AirNet address
• Error history
• Indoor unit status
• Outdoor unit status
• Forced fan ON
• Switch main sub controller
• Filter indicator
• Test filter auto clean
• Brush/Filter ind
• Disable filter auto clean

2.3 BRC4C, BRC7E Series

1 ON OFF
8
3 H M L
DOWN 10
C ON OFF
6 UP
TEMP
FAN H M L TIME 11
4 C
hr. UP
9 DOWN
2 hr. FAN
13
RESERVE CANCEL
hr.
5 TIMER 12
hr.
TEST
MODE 15
7
SWING 14
TEST
16
TEST 17
DISPLAY (SIGNAL TRANSMISSION) FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON

1
This lights up when a signal is being transmitted. 9 Press this button to select the fan speed, HIGH or
LOW, of your choice.
DISPLAY (OPERATION MODE)
2 TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
This display shows the current operation mode.
Use this button for setting temperature (Operates
H•L•M 10
DISPLAY (SET TEMPERATURE) with the front cover of the remote controller
°C
3 closed.)
This display shows the set temperature.
PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON
DISPLAY hr. hr.
(PROGRAMMED TIME) Use this button for programming start and/or stop
11
4 This display shows programmed time of the time. (Operates with the front cover of the remote
system start or stop. controller opened.)
5 DISPLAY (AIRFLOW FLAP) 12 TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON

13 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON
DISPLAY (FAN SPEED)
6 14 AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
The display shows the set fan speed.
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
DISPLAY TEST (INSPECTION/TEST) 15
Press this button to select operation mode.
7 When the INSPECTION/TEST button is pressed,
16 FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
the display shows the system mode is in.
INSPECTION/TEST BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON 17 This button is used only by qualified service
8 Press the button and the system will start. Press persons for maintenance purposes.
the button again and the system will stop.

2.4 BRC4M151W16
13
2
1
6
3
7 4
8
5
9
10
11
12
18
17
15
14
16 19
20
DISPLAY (SIGNAL TRANSMISSION) TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON

1 11
This blinks when a signal is being transmitted. Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
BACKLIGHT BUTTON
DISPLAY (OPERATION MODE) 12
Press this button to turn the backlight on or off.
2 This display shows the current OPERATION SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
MODE. Operation modes supported depend 13
on the model that is connected. This sends the signals to the indoor unit.
PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON
DISPLAY NOT AVAILABLE (displayed when
operation is not supported) 14 Use this button for programming “START and/
or STOP” time.
3 When a button for a function that is not
supported on the connected model is pressed, 15 TIMER MODE ON/OFF BUTTON
this displays for 2 seconds. 16 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON
DISPLAY (SET TEMPERATURE) 17 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
4 OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
This display shows the set temperature.
Press this button to select OPERATION
DISPLAY (PROGRAMMED TIME) 18
MODE. (COOLING), (FAN),
5 This display shows PROGRAMMED TIME of
(PROGRAM DRY).
the air conditioner start or stop.
FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
6 DISPLAY (AIRFLOW BLADE)
19 Refer to the section of MAINTENANCE in the
DISPLAY (FAN SPEED) operation manual attached to the indoor unit.
7
The display shows the set fan speed. INSPECTION BUTTON
DISPLAY (INSPECTION) This button is used only by qualified service
20
When the INSPECTION BUTTON is pressed, persons for maintenance purposes.
8 Do not operate this button during normal use.
the display shows the system mode is in.
Do not operate this button during normal use.
ON/OFF BUTTON
9 Press the button and the air conditioner will

start. Press the button again and the air
conditioner will stop.
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON
10
Press this button to select the fan speed.

2.4.1 Signal Receiver Unit

BRC7M632F-6, BRC7M618-6 BRC4M61-6
Signal receiver unit installed type Signal receiver unit separate type
(Example)
21
26 25 23 25
21
24 22
22
26
23 24
∗ Layout of the display area varies by model.
EMERGENCY OPERATION SWITCH

21 This switch is readily used if the remote
controller does not work.
RECEIVER
22 This receives the signals from the remote
controller.
OPERATING INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
This lamp stays lit while the air conditioner
23
runs. It flashes when the air conditioner is in
trouble.
TIMER INDICATOR LAMP (Green)
24
This lamp stays lit while the timer is set.
AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME INDICATOR
25 LAMP (Red)
Lights up when it is time to clean the air filter.
DEFROST OPERATION LAMP (Orange)
26 Lights up when the defrosting operation has
started.

2.4.2 How to Check Initial Set Value

Press the INSPECTION button to check the initial set value.
Press the INSPECTION button twice to return to the normal mode.
Initial set value
Indoor unit model type Initial set value

Ceiling mounted cassette
FXFSQ-AR 2111
(Round flow with sensing) type
Ceiling mounted duct type FXMQ-PB
2000
FXMQ-AR
Wall mounted type FXAQ-P 1010

Main/Sub Setting SiAF341904E
3. Main/Sub Setting
Main/Sub setting is necessary when 1 indoor unit is controlled by 2 remote controllers. The
remote controllers are set at factory to Main, so you have to change one remote controller from
Main to Sub. To change a remote controller from Main to Sub, proceed as follows:
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E62, BRC1E63)

3.1.1 Field Settings
The designation of the main and sub remote controllers can be swapped. Note that this change
requires turning the power OFF and then ON again.
Basic screen
is displayed.
Select Main RC or
Press and hold Press the Cancel Sub RC using the
the Cancel button once. / (Up/Down)
button for 4 buttons, and then
seconds or more. press the
Select Switch Main Sub Menu/Enter button.
Controller and press the Press the
Service Menu/Enter button. Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is Item 2 is
settings menu displayed. displayed.
Press the Cancel button.
is displayed.
3.1.2 When an error occurred

U5: there are 2 main remote controllers when power is turned ON
Change the setting from Main to Sub on the remote controller you want to be Sub.
U8: there are 2 sub remote controller when power is turned ON
Change the setting from Sub to Main on the remote controller you want to be Main.
How to confirm Main/Sub setting

The Main/Sub setting of the remote controller is displayed on the bottom of the screen while
Checking the connection. Please stand by. is displayed.
Checking the connection.

Please stand by.
Confirm the remote controller
Main/Sub setting after power
Main RC
is turned ON.
How to change Main/Sub setting

You may change the Main/Sub setting of the remote controller while Checking the connection.
Please stand by. is displayed by pressing and holding the Mode Selector button for 4 seconds
or longer.
Error Code: U5
Checking the connection. Checking the connection.
Please stand by. Please stand by. Fan
Press and hold for 4 seconds
or longer the Mode Selector
button of sub remote
Main RC Sub RC
controller side.
Note(s) 1. It is not possible to change the Main/Sub setting from Main to Sub when only one remote
controller is connected.

SiAF341904E Main/Sub Setting
2. When 2 remote controllers are being used, it is not possible to change the setting from Main
to Sub if one of the remote controllers is already set as Main.
3.2 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together

When using both a wired and a wireless remote controller for 1 indoor unit, the wired controller
should be set to Main. Therefore, the Main/Sub switch (SS1) of the signal receiver PCB must be
set to Sub.
Main/Sub Main Sub
Main/Sub switch S S
(SS1) M M
The side painted black indicates

the switch knob position.
Transmitter assembly
S
M
2 3
1
SS1
SS2

Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller SiAF341904E
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller

If setting multiple wireless remote controllers to operate in one room, perform address setting
for the receiver and the wireless remote controller.
(This includes an individual remote controller control using the group operation.)
(For the wiring for the group operation, please refer to the installation manual attached to the
indoor unit and technical guide.)
Setting for Signal Receiver PCB

The address for the receiver is set to 1 at the factory. To change the setting, set the wireless
address switch (SS2) on the signal receiver PCB according to the table below.
Unit No. No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
3
Wireless address
3
3
switch (SS2)
2
2
2
1
1
1
The side painted black indicates
the switch knob position.
Transmitter assembly
S
M
2 3
1
SS1
SS2

SiAF341904E Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller
Setting for wireless remote controller (BRC4C, BRC7E series)

The address for the wireless remote controller is set to 1 at the factory. To change the setting,
proceed as follows:
1. Press FILTER SIGN RESET button and INSPECTION/TEST button at the same time for 4
seconds to enter field setting mode. (SETTING is indicated on the display.)
2. Press FAN button and select A or b. Each time the button is pressed, the display switches
between A and b.
3. Press UP button or DOWN button to select an address from 1-3 as same as the receiver.
Address can be set from 1-6, but the receiver does not work with addresses 4-6.
4. Press RESERVE button to confirm the setting.

5. Press INSPECTION/TEST button for 1 second to return to normal mode.
UP button
Field setting mode DOWN button
FAN button
RESERVE button
Address
Multiple setting
FILTER SIGN RESET button
INSPECTION/TEST button

Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller SiAF341904E
Setting for wireless remote controller (BRC4M151W16)

The address for the wireless remote controller is set to 1 at the factory. To change the setting,
proceed as follows:
1. Hold down the FILTER SIGN RESET button and the INSPECTION button for at least 4
seconds to get the Field Setting mode.
(Indicated in the display area in the figure.)
2. Press the SELECT button and select a multiple setting (A/b). Each time the button is
pressed the display switches between A and b.
3. Press the TEMP buttons to set the address.
Address can be set from 1 to 6, but set it to 1-3 and to same address as the receiver. (The
receiver does not work with address 4-6.)
4. When the RESERVE button is pressed, the setting is confirmed and the usual display
returns.
Address
Multiple setting
2
4

SiAF341904E Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller
Multiple Settings A/b

The command such as operation mode or temperature setting by this remote controller will be
rejected when the target indoor unit operation is restricted as by an external control such as
centralized control.
Since the setting acceptance is hard to discriminate with such circumstances there are two
setting options provided to enable discriminating by a beeping sound according to the operation:
“A: Standard” or “b: Multi System”. Set the setting according to the customer's intention.
Remote Controller Indoor Unit
Multiple Display on Behavior to the remote controller operation Other than the left
setting remote controller when the functions are restricted as by an
external control.
A: Standard All items Accepts the functions except restricted. Accepts all items
(factory set) displayed. (Sounds one long beep or three short transmitted (Sounds two
beeps) short beeps)
There may be a difference from the indoor The remote controller
unit status with remote controller display. display agrees with the
indoor unit status.
b: Multi Display only <When some restricted functions are
System items included in the transmitted items>
transmitted for a Accepts the functions except restricted.
while. (Sounds one long beep or three short
beeps)
There may be a difference from the indoor
unit status with remote controller display.
<When no restricted function is

included>
Accepts all items transmitted (Sounds two
short beeps)
The remote controller display agrees with
the indoor unit status.

Centralized Control Group No. Setting SiAF341904E
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting

5.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63
Group No. Setting (Group)
Basic screen
is displayed.
Press and hold Press the Cancel
the Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds or
more. Select Group Address
and then press the
Service Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is
settings menu Press the Cancel displayed.
is displayed. button once.
Select Group Press the Cancel
Address (Group) button once.
and then press
the Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Select the desired
Group No. using Press the Menu/Enter
the / (Up/Down) button.
buttons, and then
press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.

SiAF341904E Centralized Control Group No. Setting
Group No. Setting (Unit)

Basic screen
is displayed.
Press and hold Press the Cancel
the Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds or
more. Select Group Address
and then press the
Service Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is
settings menu Press the Cancel displayed.
is displayed. button once.
Select Group Press the Cancel
Address (Unit) button once.
and then press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Select the desired
Group No. using Press the Menu/Enter
the / (Up/Down) button.
buttons, and then
press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.

Centralized Control Group No. Setting SiAF341904E

Group No. setting by wireless remote controller for centralized control
1. When in the normal mode, press INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds or more to enter
field setting mode.
2. Set mode No. 00 with MODE button.
3. Set the group No. for each group with UP button or DOWN button.
4. Enter the selected group numbers by pressing RESERVE button.
5. Press INSPECTION/TEST button and return to the normal mode.
UP button
Mode No.
RESERVE button
MODE button
Group No.
INSPECTION/TEST
button
5.3 Group No. Setting Example
Central Remote
Controller
Indoor/Outdoor Outdoor/Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor Outdoor/Outdoor
F1 F2
F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
RC
Group Control by Remote Controller
1-00 Main RC RC Sub RC
(automatic unit address)
1-01 1-02
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
No Remote Controller
RC
1-03
1-04
Caution When turning the power supply on, the unit may often not accept any operation while 88 is
displaying after all indications were displayed once for about 1 minute on the liquid crystal
display. This is not an operative fault.

SiAF341904E Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu

6.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63
Operating the remote controller allows service data to be acquired and various services to be
set.
Basic
screen is
displayed.
Press and
hold the Press the Cancel
Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds Select an item from Service Select the desired item from
or more. settings menu and press the Item 2 sub menu, and
Menu/Enter button. press Menu/Enter button.
Service
Press the Item 2 is Item 3 is
settings menu
Cancel displayed. displayed.
is displayed. Press Cancel button. Press Cancel button.
button.
Press and
hold the
Cancel button
for 4 seconds
or more. Select the desired item from the
Maintenance menu, and then Select the desired Unit No.
Maintenance press the Menu/Enter button. using the / (Up/Down)
Item 2 is
menu is buttons. The corresponding
displayed. data will be displayed.
displayed. Press the Cancel button.

Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu SiAF341904E
6.1.1 Service Settings Menu

Service
settings Item 2 Remarks
menu
Test — —
Operation
Maintenance None —
Contact
Maintenance Contact —, 0 to 9 (in order)
Field Indoor Unit No. —
Settings
Mode No. —
First Code No. —
Second Code No. —
Demand Enable/Disable Enable, Disable
Settings 40%, 70%
Start time (by the unit of 30 minutes)
Ending time (by the unit of 30 minutes)
Min setpoints None, Single SP, 0 to 8°C
Differential —
Group Group Address (Group) Gr Addr. Set

Address
Group Address (Unit) Unit No., Gr Addr. Set
Indoor unit Unit No., Address Set
Airnet —
Address
Outdoor unit Unit No., Address Set
Airnet —
Address
Error History RC Error History Unit No., Error, Date, Time
(Up to 10 errors received by the remote
controller can be displayed.)
Indoor Unit Error History Unit No., Error, Date, Time
(Up to 5 errors from the indoor unit error
record can be displayed.)
Indoor Unit Unit No. —
Status
Th1 Suction air thermistor
Th2 Heat exchanger thermistor
Th3 —
Th4 Discharge air thermistor
Th5 —
Th6 —
Outdoor Unit Unit No. —
Status
Th1 Outdoor air thermistor
Th2 Heat exchanger thermistor
Th3 Discharge pipe thermistor
Th4 —
Th5 —
Th6 —
Forced Fan Unit No.
—
ON
Switch Main
Sub — —
controller
Filter
— —
Indicator
Test Filter — —
Auto Clean
Brush / Filter
— —
Ind
Disable Filter No, Yes
—
Auto Clean

6.1.2 Maintenance Menu

Maintenance Item 2 Remarks
Menu
Model Name Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Indoor unit The model names are displayed.
(A model code may be displayed instead, depending on
Outdoor unit the particular model.)
R-32 mark display BRC1E63 only
Operation Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Hours
Indoor unit operation hours All of these are displayed in hours.
Indoor fan operation hours
Indoor unit energized hours
Outdoor unit operation hours
Outdoor fan 1 operation hours
Outdoor fan 2 operation hours
Outdoor compressor 1
operation hours
Outdoor compressor 2
operation hours
Indoor Unit Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Status
FAN Fan tap
Speed Fan speed (rpm)
FLAP Airflow direction
EV Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
MP Drain pump ON/OFF
EH Electric heater ON/OFF
Hu Humidifier ON/OFF
TBF Anti-freezing control ON/OFF
FLOAT FLOAT SWITCH ON/OFF
T1/T2 T1/T2 input from outside ON/OFF
Th1 Suction air thermistor 1
Th2 Indoor liquid pipe thermistor
Th3 Indoor gas pipe thermistor
Th4 Discharge air thermistor 2
Th5 Infrared floor sensor 3
Th6 Control temperature 4
Outdoor Unit Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
Status
FAN step Fan tap
COMP Compressor power supply frequency (Hz)
EV1 Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
SV1 Solenoid valve ON/OFF
Pe Low pressure (MPa), BRC1E63 only
Pc High pressure (MPa), BRC1E63 only
Th1 —
Th2 —
Th3 —
Th4 —
Th5 —
Th6 —
Error Display Display error ON Displays the error on the screen.
Display error OFF Displays neither errors nor warnings.
Display warning ON Displays a warning on the screen if an error occurs.
Display warning OFF No warning is displayed.
Swap Unit Current Unit No. A unit No. can be transferred to another.
No.
Transfer Unit No.

Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu SiAF341904E
Maintenance
Item 2 Remarks
Menu
Addressed Unit No.: 0 - 15 Select the unit number you want to check.
Sensor
Value Code
00: Remote controller thermistor (°C)
01: Suction air thermistor (°C) 5
02: Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (°C)
03: Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (°C)
04: Indoor unit address No.
05: Outdoor unit address No.
06: BS unit address No.
07: Zone control address No.
08: Cooling/Heating batch address No.
09: Demand/low-noise address No.
22: Displays human presence detection rate (%) (see 7) in
Area 1 (see 6). Display value × 10%. Displays 15 for
units with no sensing type mounted.
26: Infrared sensor (°C) (See 8). Displays – for units with
no sensing type mounted.
Data The corresponding data will be displayed, based on the
Unit No. and Code selected.
1: Displays suction air temperature after correction for all models.
2: Displays temperature only for applicable models.
3: Displays floor temperature used for control (including correction) when the round flow with
sensing is connected.
4: Displays control temperature (temperature near the person when the round flow with
sensing is connected).
5: Displays suction air temperature after correction when the round flow with sensing is
connected.
6: Areas mean four areas shown on the below.
7: For human presence detection rate (%), human motion is recognized by digital output
ranging from 0 to 5 V. (5 V is output when no human presence is detected, and 0 V is output
when human presence is detected.)
4
1 3
2
Detection areas of presence sensor
(Corresponding to the punched mark
80 cm above the floor on the inner frame of the panel:
~)
Reference
(1) 0% detection rate: Human presence is not detected at all.
(2) 25% detection rate: Human presence is detected, but the sensor does not recognize human
presence.
(3) 50% detection rate: The sensor recognizes human presence (small human motion).
(4) 75% detection rate: The sensor recognized human presence (large human motion).
(5) 100% detection rate: The sensor constantly outputs 0 V. Continuing this condition will
display an error.
8: Directly displays a measured value sent from the adaptor PCB.

Mode number
UP button
DOWN button
RESERVE button
MODE button
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds during normal mode to enter field setting
mode.
2. Press INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds to enter service mode.
3. Press MODE buttons to select a desired mode number. (43, 44, 45)
4. Carry out the necessary setting for each mode with UP button or DOWN button.
5. Press RESERVE button to confirm the setting.
6. Press INSPECTION/TEST button to return to normal mode.
Mode Function Content and Operation Method Example of Remote Controller Display
No.
43 Forced Fan Turns the fan ON for each unit
ON individually.
44 Individual Sets fan speed and airflow

Setting direction for each unit individually
when using group control.
Settings are made using the airflow
direction adjustment and fan speed
adjustment buttons.
45 Unit No. Changes unit No.

Change
Set the unit No. after changing with
the programming time up-down
button.

SiAF341904E
Part 4
Functions and Control
1. Operation Flowchart..............................................................................79
2. Stop Control ..........................................................................................80
2.1 Abnormal Shutdown ...............................................................................80
2.2 Slave Unit Stops during Master Unit Operation......................................80
3. Standby Control ....................................................................................81
3.1 Restart Standby......................................................................................81
4. Startup Control ......................................................................................82
4.1 Cooling Startup Control ..........................................................................82
5. Normal Operation..................................................................................83
5.1 List of Functions in Normal Operation ....................................................83
5.2 Compressor Control ...............................................................................83
5.3 Compressor Capacity Control ................................................................84
5.4 Operating Priority and Rotation of Compressors....................................85
5.5 Compressor Step Control.......................................................................86
5.6 Step Control of Outdoor Fans ................................................................86
6. Protection Control .................................................................................87
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................87
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................87
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................88
6.4 Compressor Body Protection Control.....................................................88
6.5 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................89
7. Special Control......................................................................................90
7.1 Outdoor Unit Rotation.............................................................................90
7.2 Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................91
7.3 Inverter Pre-Heat Operation ...................................................................92
8. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................93
8.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature................................93
8.2 Thermostat Control.................................................................................93
8.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control ..............................................................95
8.4 Airflow Direction Control.........................................................................96
8.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFSQ only) ...........................................97
8.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFSQ only)..............................................97
8.7 Drain Pump Control................................................................................98
8.8 Freeze-Up Prevention Control..............................................................100
8.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control ................................................101
8.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .....................................................102
8.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFSQ only)..........................................................103
78 Part 4 Functions and Control

SiAF341904E Operation Flowchart
1. Operation Flowchart
For detailed description of each function in the flow, refer to the details on related function on
the following pages.
Stop control
(1) Abnormal shutdown
(2) Slave unit stops during master unit operation
Special control
Standby control
(1) Restart standby
Thermostat ON
Thermostat OFF
Thermostat
(1) Outdoor unit rotation
Startup control ON
(including pressure equalization before startup)
(1) Cooling startup control
Thermostat OFF
Abnormality
End of
startup
control
Normal operation
(1) List of functions in normal operation
(2) Compressor capacity control
(3) Operating priority and rotation of
compressors
(4) Compressor step control Conditions met for oil return
(5) Electronic expansion valve control (2) Oil return operation (note 1)
(6) Step control of outdoor fans
Protection control
(1) High pressure protection control
(2) Low pressure protection control
(3) Discharge pipe protection control (3) Inverter pre-heat operation
(4) Compressor body protection control
(5) Inverter protection control
Note(s) 1. In the event indoor unit stops or the thermostat turns OFF while in oil return operation, pump
down residual operation is performed on completion of the oil return operation.
Part 4 Functions and Control 79

Stop Control SiAF341904E
2. Stop Control
2.1 Abnormal Shutdown
 If abnormal situation occurs to protect the compressor, initial thermostat OFF stops the
outdoor unit.
 Outdoor control will perform a retry start.
 When the retry attempts reach a certain number, system will stop and error code is
displayed on the remote control.
 BRC1E series remote controller stores the last 10 error codes for remote controller and the
last 5 error codes for indoor unit. You can check the Error History in Service Settings.
 Consult the troubleshooting chart on the displayed error code to define cause of abnormal
stop.
2.2 Slave Unit Stops during Master Unit Operation

When slave unit is stopped (because of low demand), conditions for this units are set same as
system stop.
System stop until this unit is required to operate (increase of load).

SiAF341904E Standby Control
3. Standby Control
3.1 Restart Standby
Used to forcedly stop the compressor for a period of 5 minutes, in order to prevent the frequent
ON/OFF of the compressor and equalize the pressure within the refrigerant system.
In addition, the outdoor fan carry out the residual operation for a while to accelerate pressure
equalizing and to suppress melting of the refrigerant to the evaporator.

Startup Control SiAF341904E
4. Startup Control
Before starting the compressor:
 The capacitor is charged in the DC circuit of the inverter circuit, and
 “Pre-pressure equalization” is performed to reducing the starting current of the compressor.
Pc: High pressure sensor detection value
Pe: Low pressure sensor detection value
Ta: Outdoor air temperature
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
ON 120 seconds
Thermostat
signal OFF
Approx. 550 V
DC circuit
0V
capacitors Step 4
Fan motor(s) OFF
M1F: RXQ6-12A
M1F + M2F: RXQ14-20A
ON
Solenoid valve
oil return OFF
4.1 Cooling Startup Control

Frequency step up
5 sec. interval
Inverter compressor 1 0 Hz
(M1C)
Inverter compressor 2 0 Hz
(M2C)
∗ RXQ16-20A only
Electronic expansion 0 pulse

valve (Injection)
(Y2E) Ta < 20˚C: OFF +1step/15 sec. (Pc > 2.16 MPa)
Inverter fan Step4 Ta ≥ 20˚C: Step4 –1step/15 sec. (Pc < 1.77 MPa)
M1F: RXQ6-12A
M1F + M2F: RXQ14-20A
Pc – Pe > 0.21 MPa

& Te < 10˚C
Te < Th2(∗) – 10
∗ Th2 in "Pre-pressure
equalization"

SiAF341904E Normal Operation
5. Normal Operation
5.1 List of Functions in Normal Operation
Pc : High pressure sensor detection value
Pe : Low pressure sensor detection value
Part Name Electric RXQ6-12A RXQ14A RXQ16-20A Function of Functional Part

Symbol
Inverter compressor 1 M1C    PI control by Te target.
Inverter compressor 2 M2C — — 
Inverter fan 1 M1F    Fan speed 10 steps to keep
minimum Tc target 34°C.
Inverter fan 2 M2F —  
Electronic expansion valve 0-480 pulse at compressor on
(Injection) Y2E   
Electronic expansion valve Minimum pulse

Y4E   
Solenoid valve (Oil return 1) Y3S    Only close if Pc – Pe < 0.3 MPa
(when compressor off)
Solenoid valve (Oil return 2) Y4S — — 
: equipped
—: not equipped
5.2 Compressor Control

In order to provide a steady capacity, the compressor capacity is controlled to achieve
temperature Te during cooling operation.
During cooling operation
The compressor capacity is controlled so Te approaches TeS (target value of temperature).
1. VRTsmart Control
 When all the connected indoor units are VRTsmart control applicable models
Applicable models: FXFSQ-AR, FXMQ-PB
The required capacity is calculated based on the operation condition of each individual indoor
unit and this data is transmitted to the outdoor unit. The outdoor unit adjusts the refrigerant
temperature of the whole system to an adequate value according to the indoor unit that needs
the most capacity.
In case of target evaporation temperature adjustment, first the capacity is adjusted by changing
the indoor unit airflow to L tap. If the capacity is still too much, the target evaporation
temperature is elevated further to adjust.
2. VRT Control
 When one or more of the connected indoor units are not VRTsmart control applicable
models
If the required capacity becomes low in all indoor units (Room temperature Th1 – set
temperature), the target evaporation temperature is elevated further to adjust. In the outdoor
unit, the difference of temperature (∆T) in all indoor units is checked and the set temperature is
changed. Unlike VRTsmart control, there is no airflow control of the indoor units.
3. Te fix Control
The target evaporation temperature is not changed.
Te value (Set in mode 2-8)
Standard (Factory
High
setting)
6 7 8 9 10 11
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
TeS: Te target value (varies according to Te setting, compressor operation frequency, etc.)

Normal Operation SiAF341904E
5.3 Compressor Capacity Control

Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
Capacity steps
The compressor rotation speed is changed according to the control pressure.
 Cooling: suction pressure sensor value is converted into evaporation saturated temperature
(relation between pressure and evaporating temperature based on characteristics of
refrigerant R-410A). For detailed explanation refer to chapter field settings (Details of
Setting Mode (m2) on page 143 and installation manual outdoor chapter Energy saving and
optimum operation).
 Initial selection is made between Automatic, Fixed or High sensible.
 During operation, the outdoor target evaporating temperature can be changed based on
the selected sub function, taking indoor load into account.
 The initial target saturated temperature can be changed. For details refer to Details of
Setting Mode (m2) on page 143 for Cooling: Te set based on field setting 2-8.
 During operation, outdoor control will take into account the pressure drop so that at indoor
units, the preset target temperature is reached (average). The estimated pressure drop is
calculated based on:
 Pressure drop characteristics found during test-operation outdoor (step 7). At several
evaporating temperatures, outdoor control stores difference between outdoor
evaporating temperature and average of indoor heat exchanger (indoor evaporating
temperature).
 To have judgment of gas speed in main suction pipe, control takes the capacity step of
the outdoor unit into account. In function of pressure drop characteristics at the different
compressor capacity steps, control concludes the category of system pipe lay out (long,
medium, short).
 Target Te outdoor (cooling) = Te set – estimated pressure drop – A.
 Correction factor A depends on the absolute value of the difference between indoor air inlet
temperature and a set temperature after startup period.

SiAF341904E Normal Operation
5.4 Operating Priority and Rotation of Compressors

Each compressor operates in the following order of priority.
In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each compressor operates in any of Pattern 1 through
Pattern 3 according to the rotation of outdoor units.
M1C: Inverter compressor 1

M2C: Inverter compressor 2
Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3
Single Outdoor Unit
No. 1 No. 1 No. 2
M1C M1C M2C
Double Outdoor Units
No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 1 No. 3 No. 2 No. 4

No. 2 No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 3 No. 2 No. 4 No. 1 No. 3
M1C M1C M1C M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C
Triple Outdoor Units
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

No. 3 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 1 No. 2 No. 4
No. 2 No. 3 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 1 No. 4
M1C M1C M1C M1C M1C M1C M2C
No. 1 No. 2 No. 4 No. 3 No. 5 No. 1 No. 4 No. 2 No. 5 No. 3 No. 6
M1C M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C
Note(s) 1. In the case of combination of 3 outdoor units, the above diagram shows master unit, slave
unit 1, and slave unit 2 from left to right.
2. Compressors may operate in any pattern other than those mentioned above according to the
operating status.

Normal Operation SiAF341904E
5.5 Compressor Step Control

 The actual rotation speed per second of the compressor (rps) depends on the type of
compressor:
Actual rotation Model name
Compressor speed
(rps) RXQ6/8A RXQ10-14A RXQ16/18A RXQ20A
JT1GUVDYR frequency/2 M1C – M1C, M2C M1C
JT16KCVDYR frequency/3 – M1C – M2C
 The change of compressor capacity step corresponds to 1 rps / step.

 The control can skip an number of steps to reach faster the target saturation temperature.
5.6 Step Control of Outdoor Fans

Used to control the revolutions of outdoor fans in the steps listed in table below, according to
condition changes.
Fan revolutions (rpm)

STEP
RXQ14-18A RXQ20A
No. RXQ6A RXQ8/10A RXQ12A
M1F M2F M1F M2F
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 350 350 350 380 0 380 0
2 360 370 370 470 0 470 0
3 370 400 400 570 0 570 0
4 400 460 460 380 380 380 380
5 430 560 560 550 520 550 520
6 490 710 710 865 665 865 665
7Y 520 750 775 940 910 940 910
7X 550 796 870 1,055 1,025 1,136 1,106
8 565 835 890 1,097 1,067 1,360 1,180
Note(s) Figures listed above are for standard mode. Values may differ when the system is set to high
static pressure mode or capacity priority mode.

SiAF341904E Protection Control
6. Protection Control
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control
This high pressure protection control is used to prevent the activation of protection devices due
to abnormal increase of high pressure and to protect compressors against the transient
increase of high pressure.
Cooling
The following control is performed in the entire system.
Normal operation
Pc: High pressure sensor detection
Pc > 3.55 MPa Pc < 3.04 MPa value for each outdoor unit.
Reduce compressor capacity step
Pc > 3.72 MPa

When occurring 3 times within 40
minutes, high pressure switch is
High pressure standby activated without high pressure standby,
thus outputting the error code E3.
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control

This low pressure protection control is used to protect compressors against the transient
decrease of low pressure.
Cooling
Because of common low pressure, the following control is performed in the system.
Normal operation
Pe < 0.35 MPa Pe > 0.40 MPa Pe: Low pressure sensor detection
value for master unit.
Pe < 0.07 MPa

Low pressure standby
minutes, the error code E4 is output.

Protection Control SiAF341904E
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control

This discharge pipe protection control is used to protect the compressor internal temperature
against an error or transient increase of discharge pipe temperature.
The following control is performed for each compressor of single unit as well as multi units.
Inverter compressor
Normal operation
Discharge pipe Discharge pipe

temperature > 108°C temperature < 95°C
Discharge pipe temperature > 135°C

Discharge pipe temperature standby minutes, the error code F3 is output.
(Sub code - 01, 02, 03)
6.4 Compressor Body Protection Control

This compressor body protection control is used to protect the compressor internal temperature
against an error or transient increase of compressor body temperature.
The following control is performed for each compressor of single unit as well as multi units.
Inverter compressor
Normal operation
Compressor body
temperature > 108°C
Compressor body
temperature > 135°C
Compressor body temperature standby minutes, the error code F3 is output.
(Sub code - 20, 21, 22)

SiAF341904E Protection Control
6.5 Inverter Protection Control

Inverter current protection control and radiation fin temperature control are performed to prevent
tripping due to an error, or transient inverter overcurrent, and fin temperature increase.
In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each inverter compressor performs these controls in
the following sequence.
Inverter overcurrent protection control

Perform the following control of integrated as well as multi units for each inverter compressor.
Normal operation
A B
Reduce compressor capacity

Inverter current standby minutes, the error code L8 is
output.
RXQ6/8A RXQ10-14A RXQ16/18A RXQ20A

Condition
M1C M1C M1C, M2C M1C M2C
A more than 17.0 A more than 27.5 A more than 17.0 A more than 17.0 A more than 27.5 A
B less than 17.0 A less than 27.5 A less than 17.0 A less than 17.0 A less than 27.5 A
C more than 17.6 A more than 27.5 A more than 17.6 A more than 17.6 A more than 27.5 A
Radiation fin temperature control

Perform the following control of integrated as well as multi units for each inverter compressor.
Normal operation
A B
Reduce compressor capacity

Fin temperature standby minutes, the error code L4 is output.
Condition All inverter compressors

A more than 110 °C
B less than 107 °C
C more than 114 °C

Special Control SiAF341904E
7. Special Control
7.1 Outdoor Unit Rotation
In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, this outdoor unit rotation is used to prevent the
compressor from breaking down due to unbalanced oil level between outdoor units.
Details of outdoor unit rotation

In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each outdoor unit is given an operating priority for the
control.
Outdoor unit rotation makes it possible to change the operating priority of outdoor units.
Thus, the system becomes free of compressors that stop over an extended period of time at the
time of partial loading, preventing unbalanced oil level.
Timing of outdoor unit rotation
OR
 After oil return operation
 At the beginning of the startup control
 There are outdoor units that stop operation.
 Low pressure of all outdoor units in operation is less than 0.25 MPa.
Example) The following diagram shows outdoor unit rotation in combination of 3 outdoor units.
Startup
control Oil return
Normal operation operation Normal operation
Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outdoor unit Priority Priority Priority Outdoor unit Priority Priority Priority
rotation 1 2 3 rotation 3 1 2
Cooling
·There are outdoor

units that stop
operation.
OR
·Low pressure of all
outdoor units in
operation < 0.25 MPa.
Normal operation Normal operation
Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Priority Priority Priority Outdoor unit Priority Priority Priority

2 3 1 rotation 1 2 3
Note(s) 1. “Master unit”, “slave unit 1” and “slave unit 2” in this section are the names for installation.
They are determined in installation work, and not changed thereafter. (These names are
different from “master unit” and “slave unit” for control.)
The outdoor unit connected the control wires (F1 and F2) for the indoor unit should be
designated as master unit.
Consequently, The LED display on the main PCB for “master unit”, “slave unit 1” and “slave unit
2” do not change.

SiAF341904E Special Control
7.2 Oil Return Operation

In order to prevent the compressor from running out of oil, the oil return operation is conducted
to recover oil that has flowed out from the compressor to the system side.
Tc : High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
Ts: Suction pipe temperature detected by thermistor R3T
Starting conditions
Referring to the set conditions for the following items, start the oil return operation in cooling.
 Cumulative oil feed rate
 Timer setting (Make this setting so as to start the oil return operation when the initial
cumulative operating time reaches 2 hours after power supply is turned ON and then every 8
hours.)
Furthermore, the cumulative oil feed rate is computed from Tc, Te, and compressor loads.
Electric
Part Name Symbol RXQ6-12A RXQ14A RXQ16-20A Function of Functional Part
Inverter compressor 1 M1C    Capacity step PI control

Inverter compressor 2 M2C — — 
Inverter fan 1 M1F    TC control
Inverter fan 2 M2F —  
Electronic expansion valve 0 pulse
(Injection) Y2E   
Electronic expansion valve 480 pulse

Y4E   
Solenoid valve (Oil return 1) Y3S    ON
Solenoid valve (Oil return 2) Y4S — — 
Ending conditions
· A lapse of 3 minutes.
& · Ts1–Te < 3°C
OR · A lapse of 6 minutes
while the frequency
is more than that of
oil return operation.
Indoor unit actuator Cooling oil return operation

Fan Thermostat ON unit Remote controller setting
Non-operating unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit Remote controller setting
Electronic expansion valve Thermostat ON unit Normal control
Non-operating unit 224 pulse
Thermostat OFF unit Normal control with forced thermostat
ON

Special Control SiAF341904E
7.3 Inverter Pre-Heat Operation

Inverter pre-heat function is performed by each compressor on its own.
HTdi : Value of inverter compressor discharge pipe temperature (Tdi) compensated with
outdoor air temperature
Ta : Outdoor air temperature
Teg : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
Tfin : Fin thermistor temperature
1) System is stopped (all compressors are stopped)

Power supply ON
Pre-heat OFF
· Elapsing time after · Elapsing time after

power supply ON 6 hours power supply ON 侒 6 hours
OR &
· Own compressor HTdi Teg + 15 · Own compressor HTdi Teg + 20
& · Ta 25°C OR · Ta 26°C
Pre-heat ON
· Own Tfin 侒 95°C · Own Tfin 侑 85°C
Pre-heat OFF
2) System is operating (at least one compressor is operating)
Pre-heat OFF
· Compressor is stopped () · Compressor is operating ()

& OR
· Own compressor HTdi Teg + 15 · Each compressor HTdi Teg + 20
Pre-heat ON
· Own Tfin 侒 78°C · Own Tfin 68°C
Pre-heat OFF
Represents the operating state of each compressor.

SiAF341904E Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
8. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)

8.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature
The relationship between remote controller set temperature and control target temperature is
described below.
Temperature ˚C
Remote controller set temperature

Cooling
Control target temperature
Examples are given to illustrate a control target temperature that satisfies the remote controller
set temperature.
Regarding control target temperature

When using the infrared floor sensor, the temperature around people will be treated as the
control target temperature for operation.
What is the temperature around people?

The temperature around people refers to the temperature of the living space, obtained from the
temperature around the ceiling and the temperature underfoot. The temperature is calculated
using the detected values of the suction air thermistor and the infrared floor sensor.
It is difficult to use only suction air temperature control for underfoot air conditioning.
8.2 Thermostat Control

8.2.1 Without Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor
The thermostat ON/OFF condition is determined by the difference between the remote
controller set temperature and the actual detected room temperature (1).
 Normal operation
 Cooling operation
ΔT ≤ –1.0°C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
ΔT ≥ +1.0°C
 Dry operation
 When Tro < 24.5°C
Tr < Tro – 1.0°C
Dry operation Thermostat OFF
Tr > Tro + 1.0°C
 When Tro ≥ 24.5°C

Tr < Tro – 1.5°C
Tr > Tro + 0.5°C
ΔT = Detected room temperature – Remote controller set temperature

Tro: Detected room temperature at the start of dry operation
Tr: Determined by the room temperature detected by the thermistor
Note(s) 1: The thermistor used to detect room temperature is according to the field setting 10 (20)-2.

Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) SiAF341904E
8.2.2 With Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor

The thermostat ON/OFF condition is determined by the difference between the remote
controller set temperature and the detected temperature around people.
 Normal operation
 Cooling operation
ΔT ≤ –1.0°C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
ΔT ≥ +1.0°C
 Dry operation
 When Tro ≤ 24.5°C
Tr < Tro – 1.0°C
Tr > Tro + 1.0°C
 When Tro > 24.5°C

Tr < Tro – 1.5°C
Tr > Tro + 0.5°C
ΔT = Detected room temperature – Remote controller set temperature

Tro: Detected room temperature at the start of dry operation
Tr: Determined by the room temperature detected by the thermistor
Control range of temperature around people

When the floor temperature is very low, operation using the temperature around people may
cause the suction air temperature to operate outside of use range.
To avoid the above condition, a limit based on the suction air temperature is set for the use
range of the temperature around people.
 Cooling operation
 When the floor temperature is lower than suction air thermistor detection temperature
(R1T), R1T will be treated as the control target temperature for operation.
 When the temperature around people is 15°C or lower, R1T will be treated as the control
temperature for operation.

8.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control

The automatic airflow rate control (Five steps from H to L) is based on the difference between
control target temperature and set temperature.
When airflow
Conditions Automatic airflow rate
rate is set
Cooling Thermostat ON The fan tap is determined
by the difference between
Set control target
temperature
and set temperature.
Thermostat OFF The fan keeps rotating at
Set (1) the speed as just before
the thermostat off (1)
Program dry Thermostat ON L L
Thermostat OFF OFF OFF
Fan Set M
Stop OFF OFF
1. LL airflow for FXFSQ
Fan tap <Change in airflow rate under
automatic airflow rate control>
Except for FXFSQ,

HM and ML taps appear
only during the auto
airflow rate control
operation.
H (For FXFSQ, HM and
HM ML taps can be
M manually set with
ML remote controller.)
L
Small Difference between control target Large

temperature and set temperature

8.4 Airflow Direction Control

8.4.1 Without Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor
Refer to the table below for controlling the horizontal flap (or the vertical flap) for airflow direction
adjustment.
Conditions FXAQ
Cooling Direction set Thermostat ON Set
Thermostat OFF Set
Swing set Thermostat ON Swing
Thermostat OFF Swing
Program dry Direction set Thermostat ON Set
Thermostat OFF Set
Swing set Thermostat ON Swing
Thermostat OFF Swing
Fan Direction set Set
Swing set Swing
8.4.2 With Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor

The model can control airflow direction automatically by the difference between suction air
temperature and floor temperature.
FXFSQ
Conditions Automatic airflow rate and eco
When airflow direction is set
full automatic control
Cooling Direction set Thermostat ON Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Thermostat OFF Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Swing set Thermostat ON Swing —
Thermostat OFF Swing —
Program dry Direction set Thermostat ON Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Thermostat OFF Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Swing set Thermostat ON Swing —
Thermostat OFF Swing —
Fan Direction set Set Horizontal (P0)
Swing set Swing —
Operation in auto airflow direction control when cooling
The difference between suction air
and floor temperatures is large.
P0 (Horizontal) P1
The difference between suction air
and floor temperatures is small.
Indoor unit
P0
P1
P2
P4 P3
Flap position AIR

(Horizontal view)

8.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFSQ only)

In the case where both this control is activated and auto airflow direction control (eco full
automatic control) is set, when human presence is detected, the airflow direction is
automatically set to horizontal (P0) to reduce discomfort by direct airflow.
This control works for each airflow outlet individually.
Note: This function is inoperative for the airflow outlet where an individual airflow direction is set.
Absence continues for 5 mins

Airflow direction by auto airflow direction
P0 (horizontal)
Cooling: P0 or P1
When presence is detected
8.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFSQ only)

This is a generic term for the setting where both fan speed and airflow direction are set to
"Auto." For detailed control contents, refer to Automatic Airflow Rate Control and Airflow
Direction Control.

8.7 Drain Pump Control

8.7.1 Normal Operation
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min.
 The float switch is ON in normal operation.

 When cooling operation starts (thermostat ON), the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
 After the thermostat turns OFF, the drain pump continues to operate for another 5 minutes.
 The aim of residual operation after thermostat OFF is to eliminate the dew that condenses
on the indoor heat exchanger during cooling operation.
8.7.2 If the Float Switch is OFF with the Thermostat ON in Cooling

Operation
∗1 ∗2 ∗3
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec. 5 min. 5 sec.
 When the float switch turns OFF, the thermostat turns OFF simultaneously.
 After the thermostat turns OFF, the drain pump continues to operate for another 5 minutes.
1: If the float switch turns ON again during the residual operation of the drain pump, cooling
operation also turns on again (thermostat ON).
2: If the float switch remains OFF even after the residual operation of the drain pump has
ended, the error code A3 is displayed on the remote controller.
The drain pump turns OFF once residual operation has ended, then turns ON again after 5
seconds.
3: After A3 is displayed and the unit comes to an abnormal stop, the thermostat will remain
OFF even if the float switch turns ON again.

8.7.3 If the Float Switch is OFF with the Thermostat OFF in Cooling
Operation
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec.
 When the float switch turns OFF, the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
 If the float switch remains OFF even after residual operation of the drain pump has ended,
the error code A3 is displayed on the remote controller.
 The drain pump turns OFF once residual operation has ended, then turns ON again after 5
seconds.
8.7.4 If the Float Switch Turns OFF and ON Continuously, or the Float
Switch Turns OFF While AF Displayed
∗1 ∗2 ∗3
} }
OFF
Float switch
ON
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
AF A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 sec.
 When the float switch turns OFF, the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
1: If the float switch continues to turn OFF and ON 5 times consecutively, it is judged as a drain
system error and the error code AF is displayed on the remote controller.
2: The drain pump continues to turn ON/OFF in accordance with the float switch ON/OFF even
after AF is displayed on the remote controller.
3:While the error code AF is displayed, if the float switch remains OFF even after the residual
operation of the drain pump has ended, the error code A3 will be displayed on the remote
controller.

8.8 Freeze-Up Prevention Control

Freeze-Up Prevention by Off Cycle (Indoor Unit Individual Control)
When the temperature detected by liquid pipe temperature thermistor of the indoor heat
exchanger drops too low, the unit enters freeze-up prevention control in accordance with the
following conditions, and is also set in accordance with the conditions given below. (Thermostat
OFF)
When freeze-up prevention is activated, the airflow rate is fixed to L tap. When the following
conditions for cancelling are satisfied, it will reset.
Conditions for starting:

Liquid pipe temperature ≤ – 1°C (for total of 40 minutes)
or
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ – 5°C (for total of 10 minutes)
Condition for cancelling:

Liquid pipe temperature ≥ +7°C (for 10 minutes continuously)
Liquid pipe 10 min.
temperature
+7ºC
0ºC
–5ºC
Freeze-up prevention control
Forced OFF by thermostat Normal operation
10 min.
Start Cancel
The idea of freeze-up prevention control

Difficult to carry out freeze-up prevention operation
· For comfort, suppression of frequent thermostat ON/OFF is necessary.
· Suppressing the switching frequency of the compressor is required to ensure reliability.
After freeze-up prevention operation is carried out, the compressor can be defrosted properly.
· Water leakage prevention must be effective.
Note(s)  When the indoor unit is a round flow type, if the air outlet is set as dual-directional or
tridirectional, the starting conditions will be changed as follows.
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ 1°C (for total of 15 minutes)
or
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ 0°C (for 1 minute continuously)
During freeze-up prevention operation, the airflow rate is fixed to LL.
(The cancelling conditions are same as the standard.)

8.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control

8.9.1 FXFSQ Models
Indoor operation under a certain condition will limit the swing range of the flaps.
Position P0 continues
Dew condensation for 30 minutes.
Dew condensation
prevention control OFF prevention control in action
Thermostat OFF
Refer to the table below for flap action under this control.
Indoor unit
P0
P1
P2
P4 P3
Flap position AIR
(Observed horizontally)
Dew condensation prevention control

Flap setting OFF In action
P0 P0 P1
P1 P1 P1
P2 P2 P2
P3 P3 P3
P4 P4 P4
Swing P0 – P4 P1 – P4
8.9.2 FXAQ Models

In cooling and dry operation, the following control is carried out in order to prevent dew
condensation when the horizontal blade blows air downward.
Starting condition
● Horizontal blade is set to downward flow (Position A)

&
● Cooling operation (compressor operation) continues for B minutes.
Dew condensation prevention control
Dry operation with horizontal airflow (Position C) is carried out for 1 hour.
Indoor unit
P0
P1
P2
P4 P3
Flap position AIR
(Observed horizontally)
FXAQ
Position A P4
B (minutes) 20
Position C P3
Note(s) When there is any change to fan operation, airflow direction and operation ON/OFF state during
dew condensation prevention control, this control is canceled.

8.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

Electronic expansion valves in indoor units have the functions of conducting superheated
degree control in cooling operation. However, if the indoor units receive any control command
such as a protection control command or a special control command from the outdoor unit, the
units will give a priority to the control command.
• Superheated degree control in cooling operation
This function is used to adjust the opening of the electronic expansion valve so that
superheated degree (SH), which is calculated from the detection temperature (Tg) of the gas
pipe thermistor (R3T) and the detection temperature (Tl) of the liquid temperature thermistor
(R2T) of the indoor unit, will come close to a target superheated degree (SHS).
At that time, correction to the superheated degree is made according to the differences (ΔT)
between set temperature and suction air temperature.
SH = Tg – Tl
SH: Evaporator outlet superheated degree (°C)
Tg: Indoor unit gas pipe temperature (R3T)
Tl: Indoor unit liquid pipe temperature (R2T)
SHS (Target superheated degree)

• Normally 5°C.
• As ΔT (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes larger, SHS becomes lower.
• As ΔT (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes lower, SHS becomes larger.

8.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFSQ only)

Unevenness of room temperature and the startup time are improved by repeating 2-direction
horizontal blow-off and swing alternately.
8.11.1 Initiation Conditions of Circulation Operation

When operation starts (in the startup state)
Circulation airflow operation is performed.
During normal operation

The unit automatically determines operation based on the room temperature condition and time
to switch circulation airflow operation and the normal auto airflow rate and direction (eco full
automatic control).
Circulation airflow operation continues for up to 90 minutes
Circulation airflow Auto airflow rate and direction Circulation airflow

Room temp.
Set temp.
Target temp. Δt
Time
8.11.2 Operational Concept (Standard Panel)

Cooling
: Factory setting
Movement pattern (a) (b) (c) (d)
01: Pattern 1 120 600 120 600

Appearance
Time (sec.) 02: Pattern 2 120 600 0 0
03: Pattern 3 0 0 120 600
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 600 120 600
Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (the flap is inverted).

8.11.3 Operational Concept (Designer Panel)

Cooling
Movement pattern (a) (b) (c) (d)
01: Pattern 1 120 600 120 600

Appearance
Time (sec.) 02: Pattern 2 120 600 0 0
03: Pattern 3 0 0 120 600
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 600 120 600
Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (the flap is inverted).

SiAF341904E
Part 5
Field Settings and
Test Operation
1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit...............................................................106
1.1 Field Settings from Remote Controller .................................................106
1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit .....................................................111
1.3 Applicable Range of Field Settings ......................................................113
1.4 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit................................................114
1.5 Operation Control Mode .......................................................................126
2. Field Settings for Outdoor Unit............................................................128
2.1 Function Setting ...................................................................................128
2.2 Settings by DIP Switches .....................................................................129
2.3 Settings by BS Buttons.........................................................................132
2.4 Normal Mode........................................................................................134
2.5 Monitor Mode (Mode 1) ........................................................................135
2.6 Setting Mode (Mode 2).........................................................................139
2.7 Eco Mode Setting .................................................................................150
2.8 Setting of Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation...151
3. Test Operation ....................................................................................155
3.1 Checks before Test Operation .............................................................155
3.2 Checkpoints..........................................................................................155
3.3 Test Operation Procedure ....................................................................156
3.4 Turn Power ON ....................................................................................157
Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation 105

Field Settings for Indoor Unit SiAF341904E
1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit

1.1 Field Settings from Remote Controller
Individual function of indoor unit can be changed from the remote controller. At the time of
installation or after service inspection / repair, make the field setting in accordance with the
following description.
Wrong setting may cause error.
(When optional accessory is mounted on the indoor unit, setting for the indoor unit may be
required to change. Refer to information in the option handbook.)
1.1.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63

Basic screen
(1) 1 Press and hold Cancel button for 4

seconds or more.
Service settings menu is displayed.
2 Select Field settings in the service

settings menu, and press Menu/Enter
button.
Field settings screen is displayed.
3 Highlight the mode, and select desired

mode No. by using (Up/Down)
button.
Service settings menu screen
4 In the case of setting per indoor unit
(2) during group control (When Mode No.
such as 20, 21, 22, 23, 25 are
selected), highlight the unit No. and
select indoor unit No. to be set by
using (Up/Down) button. (In the
case of group total setting, this
operation is not needed.)
In the case of individual setting per
indoor unit, current settings are
displayed. And, second code No.
“ - ” means no function.
Press Menu/Enter button.
5 Highlight second code No. of the first
Field settings screen
code No. to be changed, and select
desired second code No. by using
In the case of individual In the case of group total (Up/Down) button. Multiple identical
setting per indoor unit setting
mode number settings are available.
(3) (3) In the case of group total setting, all
(4) (5) of second code No. which may be
set are displayed as “ ”.
(5)
“ ” is changed to second code No.
to be set. And, second code No. “ - ”
means no function.
Second code No.
First code No.
106 Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation

SiAF341904E Field Settings for Indoor Unit
6 Press Menu/Enter button. Setting

Setting confirmation screen
confirmation screen is displayed.
(6)
(7) 7 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter
button. Setting details are determined
and field settings screen returns.
8 In the case of multiple setting

changes, repeat (3) to (7).
9 After all setting changes are

completed, press Cancel button twice.

10 Backlight goes out, and Checking the
connection. Please standby. is
displayed for initialization. After the
initialization, the basic screen returns.
Setting confirmed
CAUTION
When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor
unit may be changed. See the manual of the optional accessory.
For field setting details of the outdoor unit, see installation manual attached to the
outdoor unit.

1.1.2 BRC4C, BRC7E Series
UP button
Mode No.
RESERVE button
First code No.
MODE button
Second code No.
INSPECTION/TEST
button
Setting
To set the field settings, you have to change:
 Mode No.
 First code No.
 Second code No.
To change the field settings, proceed as follows:

1. Press the INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds during normal mode to enter the field
setting mode.
2. Press the MODE button to select the desired mode No.
3. Press the UP button to select the first code No.
4. Press the DOWN button to select the second code No.
5. Press the RESERVE button to confirm the setting.
6. Press the INSPECTION/TEST button to return to the normal mode.

1.1.3 BRC4M151W16
Mode No.
First code Second

No. code No.
4
3
5
1,6
Setting
To set the field settings, you have to change:
 Mode No.
 First code No.
 Second code No.
To change the field settings, proceed as follows:

1. Hold down the INSPECTION button for at least 4 seconds during normal mode to enter the
field setting mode.
2. Press the MODE button to select the desired mode No.
3. Press the FAN or BACK LIGHT button to select the first code No.
4. Press the TEMP button to select the second code No.
5. Press the RESERVE button to set the present settings.
6. Press the INSPECTION button to return to the normal mode.

1.1.4 Simplified Remote Controller
Mode No.
First code
No.
Unit No.
Second
code No.
(3)
(3)
(2)(8) (7) (4) (5) (6)
1. Remove the upper part of remote controller.

2. When in the normal mode, press the BS6 button (2) (field setting) to enter the field setting
mode.
3. Select the desired MODE No. with the BS2 button (3) (temperature setting ) and the BS3
button (3) (temperature setting ).
4. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22, and 23 have been
selected), press the BS8 (4) button (unit No.) and select the indoor unit No. to be set. (This
operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
5. Press the BS9 button (5) (set A) and select first code No.
6. Press the BS10 button (6) (set B) and select second code No.
7. Press the BS7 button (7) (set/cancel) once and the present settings are confirmed.
8. Press the BS6 button (8) (field setting) to return to the normal mode.

1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit

Mode First Description Second Code No.
No. Code
(2) No. 01 02 03 04
Filter cleaning Long life filter Approx. Approx.
sign interval 10,000 5,000
hrs. hrs.
Ultra long life Approx. Approx.
0 filter Light 2,500 Heavy 1,250 — —
hrs. hrs.
Standard filter Approx. Approx.
200 100
hrs. hrs.
Filter type Ultra long life
1 Long life filter — —
filter
Remote controller thermistor Remote
10 (20) controller Only remote
Only suction air
2 thermistor + controller —
Suction air thermistor thermistor
thermistor
3 Filter cleaning sign Displayed Not displayed — —
Remote controller thermistor
6 Not permitted Permitted — —
control during group control
7 (6) Time for absence area detection 30 minutes 60 minutes — —
Dry operation time during Eco Continuous (not
10 (7) mode 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes returning to
cooling)
Low airflow setting when
11 Disabled Enabled — —
thermostat OFF during Eco mode
Setting the rate of human Infrared
6 (6) detection High sensitivity Low sensitivity Standard presence sensor
sensitivity
disabled
Airflow adjustment Completion of
11 (21) 7 OFF airflow Start of airflow —
adjustment
adjustment
Compensating the temperature Priority given on Priority given on
Suction air
8 (6) around people temperature only the suction air Standard the floor
temperature temperature
Optional accessories output Indoor unit
0 selection (field selection of output turned ON by — Operation output Error output
for adaptor for wiring) thermostat
External ON/OFF input (Set when External
Forced OFF
1 ON/OFF is to be controlled from  ON/OFF control protection device —
outside.) input
Thermostat differential
12 (22) 2 changeover (Set when remote 1°C 0.5°C — —
sensor is to be used.)
Auto restart after power failure
5 Not equipped Equipped — —
reset
Airflow setting when cooling
6 LL tap Set fan speed — —
thermostat is OFF
11 (6) Compensating the floor 4°C 2°C 0°C –2°C

temperature
Ceiling height setting, Setting of
0 Refer to page 120.
normal airflow
Airflow direction setting (Set when
1 a sealing material kit has been F (4 directions) T (3 directions) W (2 directions) —
installed)
Swing pattern settings All direction
2 (6) synchronized — Facing swing —
swing
13 (23) 4 Airflow direction adjustment range Refer to page 122.
6 External static pressure settings Refer to page 122.
Setting of swing patterns when
7 cooling thermostat is OFF Refer to page 123.
13 Setting of circulation airflow Disabled Enabled — —

14 Circulation airflow patterns Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4
15 Switching panel type Standard panel Designer panel — —

Mode First Description Second Code No.

No. Code
(2) No. 01 02 03 04
Direct duct connection (when the
2 (5) indoor unit and Heat Reclaim Not equipped Equipped — —
Ventilator are connected by duct
directly.)
15 (25)
3 Drain pump and humidifier Not interlocked Interlocked — —
interlock selection
Selection for individual ventilation
5 — (Normal) Individual — —
setting by remote controller
Display of error codes on the Four-digit
4 — Two-digit display —
remote controller display
Key-lock pattern settings No menu
No operation No operation operation is No menu
allowed (Cancel allowed (Cancel operation is
1b 12 allowed (Cancel
procedure is procedure is not allowed any
procedure is
displayed.) displayed.) displayed.) time.
Setting restricted/permitted of
14 Refer to page 125.
airflow block
1c 0 Room temperature display Not displayed Displayed — —
Note(s) 1. Settings are made simultaneously for the entire group, however, if you select the mode No.
inside parentheses, you can also set by each individual unit. Setting changes however
cannot be checked except in the individual mode for those in parentheses.
2. The mode numbers inside parentheses cannot be used by wireless remote controllers, so
they cannot be set individually. Setting changes also cannot be checked.
3. Do not make settings other than those described above. Nothing is displayed for functions
the indoor unit is not equipped with.
4. 88 or Checking the connection. Please stand by. may be displayed to indicate the remote controller is
resetting when returning to the normal mode.
5. If the setting mode to “Equipped”, heat reclaim ventilation fan conducts the fan residual
operation by linking to indoor unit.
6. Available for setting when option with the built-in human detection and floor temperature
detection function is mounted.
7. Factory setting for round flow type is 04.

1.3 Applicable Range of Field Settings

Mode No. First Code Setting Contents FXFSQ-AR FXMQ-PB FXMQ-AR FXAQ-P
No.
0 Filter cleaning sign interval    
1 Filter type    
2 Remote controller thermistor    
3 Filter cleaning sign    
10 (20) Remote controller thermistor control
6    
during group control
7 Time for absence area detection  ― ― ―
10 Dry operation time during Eco mode    
Low airflow setting when thermostat
11 OFF during Eco mode    
6 Setting the rate of human detection  ― ― ―

7 Airflow adjustment ―  ― ―
11 (21)
Compensating the temperature around
8  ― ― ―
people
0 Optional accessories output selection    
1 External ON/OFF input    
2 Thermostat differential changeover    
12 (22) 5 Auto restart after power failure reset    
Airflow setting when cooling thermostat
6    
is OFF
11 Compensating the floor temperature  ― — ―
Ceiling height setting, Setting of normal
0  ― ― 
airflow
1 Airflow direction setting  ― ― ―
2 Swing pattern settings  ― ― ―
4 Airflow direction adjustment range  ― ― 
13 (23) 6 External static pressure settings ―  ― ―
Setting of swing patterns when cooling
7  ― ― 
thermostat is OFF
13 Setting of circulation airflow  ― ― ―
14 Circulation airflow patterns  ― ― ―
15 Switching panel type  ― ― ―
2 Direct duct connection  ― ― 
3 Drain pump and humidifier interlock    

15 (25) selection
Selection for individual ventilation
5    
setting by remote controller
Display of error codes on the remote
4    
controller
1b 12 Key-lock pattern settings    
Setting restricted/permitted of airflow
14    
block
1c 0 Room temperature display    
 : Available
― : Not available

1.4 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit

1.4.1 Filter Cleaning Sign Interval, Filter Type
When the setting 10 (20)-3 is set to 01 (Displayed), filter cleaning sign is displayed on the
remote controller after a certain period of operation time. This setting is used to change the
display interval of filter cleaning sign when the filter contamination is heavy.
The filter cleaning sign interval is determined as follows depending on the combination of Mode
No. 10 (20)-0 and 10 (20)-1.
Filter cleaning sign interval
10 (20)-1 01: Long life filter 02: Ultra long life filter
Setting Filter contamination Light Heavy Light Heavy
heavy/light 10 (20)-0 01 02 01 02
FXFSQ-AR
FXMQ-PB 2,500 hrs. 1,250 hrs. 10,000 hrs. 5,000 hrs.
Model
FXMQ-AR
FXAQ-P 200 hrs. 100 hrs. 200 hrs. 100 hrs.
1.4.2 Thermistor Selection

Select a thermistor to control the room temperature.
 When the unit is not equipped with an infrared floor sensor:
Mode First Second
No. Code No. Code No. Contents
Remote controller thermistor and suction air thermistor

01
in indoor unit
10 (20) 2 02 Suction air thermistor in indoor unit
03 Remote controller thermistor
The factory setting for the Second code No. is 01 and room temperature is controlled by the
suction air thermistor for indoor unit and remote controller thermistor. When the Second code
No. is set to 02, room temperature is controlled by the suction air thermistor. When the Second
code No. is set to 03, room temperature is controlled by the remote controller thermistor.
36
34 In cooling
32
Set temperature (˚C)
Suction air Remote controller Suction air

30 thermistor thermistor thermistor
Suction air Remote controller Suction air
28 thermistor thermistor thermistor
26
24
22
20
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37
Suction air temperature (˚C)

When the unit is equipped with an infrared presence/floor sensor:

Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No.
10 (20) 2 01 02 02 02# 02 03
11 (21) 8 01 01 02 03# 04 01
The thermistor to be used
Remote controller thermistor — — — —
Suction air thermistor —
Infrared floor sensor — — —
The infrared floor Priority given to Priority given to the

sensor is not used the suction air floor temperature ()
temperature ()
Only the remote
Only the suction air Standard setting controller thermistor
thermistor is used (Factory setting) is used
Refer to Compensating the temperature around people.

Note that the control is automatically switched to the one performed only by the suction air
thermistor for indoor unit when the Second code No. is 01 during the group control.
To use the remote controller thermistor during the group control, select the Second code No. 02
in First code No. 6.
Mode First Second
Contents
No. Code No. Code No.
Remote controller thermistor control is not permitted during
01 group control
10 (20) 6
Remote controller thermistor control is permitted during group
02
control
1.4.3 Filter Cleaning Sign

Whether or not to display the sign after operation of a certain duration can be selected.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Displayed
10 (20) 3
02 Not displayed
"Filter Cleaning" is not displayed when an Auto-clean Panel is connected.

1.4.4 Time for Absence Area Detection

(For units with the infrared presence sensor only)
By selecting the energy-saving operation mode in the absence, the target temperature is shifted
to the energy-saving end by 1°C (maximum 2°C) after the state of absence continues for a
certain period of time.
Absent time defined for detection can be selected as follows:
Mode First Second Contents
01 30 minutes
10 (20) 7
02 60 minutes
Human detection
Set temperature (°C)

State of absence
31
30
29
28
27 Cooling (at 28°C)
26
30 (60)∗ 60 (120)∗
Elapsed time of absence (minutes)
∗ The values in parentheses represent the time
when Second code No. is 02.
 The set temperature displayed on the remote controller remains the same even if the target
temperature is shifted.
 As soon as people are detected while the temperature is shifted, this control will be
cancelled (reset).
1.4.5 Dry Operation Time during Eco Mode

 If you switch the operation mode to "Dry" while the eco mode is enabled, the mode will
automatically switch to "Cooling" after a certain period of time is elapsed.
If you want to increase the duration of dry operation, change the Second code No. as indicated
in the following table.
Note 1) Increasing duration of dry operation degrades the energy efficiency
Mode First Second
Contents
01 30 minutes
02 60 minutes
10 (20) 10
03 90 minutes
04 Continuous (not returning to cooling)
Note 2) When group control is enabled, all indoor units in the same group have a same set value for
duration of dry operation.
1.4.6 Low Airflow Setting when Thermostat OFF during Eco Mode
This setting changes the airflow volume to LL in coordination with the eco mode when cooling thermostat
OFF is set. Also, the airflow direction is changed to horizontal.
When disabled:
12 (22)-6 (the airflow volume setting when cooling thermostat OFF is enabled)
13 (23)-7 (the swing setting when cooling thermostat OFF is enabled) is as set
When enabled: LL when Te ≥ 7°C
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Disabled
10 (20) 11
02 Enabled

1.4.7 Setting the Rate of Human Detection

(For units with the infrared presence/floor sensor only)
Set the sensitivity of the infrared presence/floor sensor.
 The infrared presence/floor sensor can be disabled by selecting the Second code No. 04.
When the infrared presence/floor sensor is disabled, the remote controller menu does not
display some functions such as the automatic draft reduction, energy-saving operation in
absence and halt in absence.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 High sensitivity
02 Low sensitivity
11 (21) 6
03 Standard sensitivity
04 Infrared presence/floor sensor disabled
1.4.8 Automatic Airflow Adjustment

 FXMQ-PB
The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated quantity.
Make settings before performing the test operation of the outdoor unit.
Setting procedure
1. Make sure that electric wiring and duct construction have been completed. In particular, if
the closing damper is installed on the way of the duct, make sure that it is open. In addition,
make sure that a field-supplied air filter is installed within the air passageway on the suction
port side.
2. If there are multiple blow-off and suction ports, adjust the throttle part so that the airflow
volume ratio of each suction/blow-off port conforms to the designed airflow volume ratio. In
that case, operate the unit with the operation mode "fan". When you want to change the
airflow rate, adjust it by pressing the airflow rate control button to select High, Middle or Low.
3. Make settings to adjust the airflow rate automatically.
After setting the operation mode to "fan", enter the field setting mode while operation is
stopped and then select the Mode No. "(21) (11 for batch setting)", set the First Code No. to
7 and the Second Code No. to 03.
4. After setting, return to the basic screen (to the normal mode in the case of a wireless remote
controller) and press the ON/OFF button. Fan operation for automatic airflow adjustment will
start with the operation lamp turned ON. Do not adjust the throttle part of the suction and
blow-off ports during automatic adjustment. After operation for approximately one to fifteen
minutes, airflow adjustment automatically stops with the operation lamp turned OFF.
5. After operation stopped, make sure that the Second Code No. is set to 02 as in the following
table by indoor unit with the Mode No. 11 (21). If operation does not stop automatically or the
Second Code No. is not set to 02, return to the step (3) above to make settings again.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 OFF
11 (21) 7 02 Completion of airflow adjustment
03 Start of airflow adjustment
Note(s) 1. Make sure that the external static pressure is within the range of specifications before making
settings. If it is outside the range, automatic adjustment fails, which may cause an insufficient
airflow volume or leakage of water.
2. If the air passageway including duct or blow-off ports is changed after automatic adjustment,
make sure to perform automatic airflow adjustment again.

1.4.9 Compensating the Temperature around People

(For units with the infrared floor sensor)
Change the ratio between the suction air temperature and floor temperature used to calculate
the temperature around people.
The temperature around people is calculated using the values of the suction air thermistor and
the infrared floor sensor. The factory setting is "Normal" (the average value of the suction air
temperature and the floor temperature is applied). However, the rate at which the suction air
thermistor and the infrared floor sensor affect the temperature around people can be changed
with this setting.
 To reflect the effect of the temperature around the ceiling, select the "Priorities given on the
suction air temperature" (the Second code No. 02).
 To reflect the effect of the temperature around the floor, select the "Priorities given on the
floor temperature" (the Second code No. 04).
 The infrared floor sensor can be disabled by selecting "Suction air temperature only" (the
Second code No. 01).
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Suction air temperature only
02 Priority given on the suction air temperature
11 (21) 8
03 Standard
04 Priority given on the floor temperature
1.4.10 Optional Accessories Output Selection

Using this setting, "operation output signal" and "abnormal output signal" can be provided.
Output signal is output between terminals X1 and X2 of "adaptor for wiring", an optional
accessory.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Indoor unit thermostat ON/OFF signal is provided.
02 —
12 (22) 0 03 Output linked with ON/OFF of remote controller is provided.
04 In case of Error Display appears on the remote controller, output is

provided.
1.4.11 External ON/OFF Input

This input is used for "ON/OFF operation" and "Protection device input" from the outside. The
input is performed from the T1-T2 terminal of the operation terminal block in the electrical
component box.
F2 T1 T2
Forced OFF
Input A
Mode First Second
Contents
ON: Forced OFF (prohibition of using the remote controller)
01 OFF: Permission of using the remote controller
OFF  ON: Operation
02
12 (22) 1 ON  OFF: Stop
ON: Operation
03 OFF: The system stops, then the applicable unit indicates A0. The
other indoor units indicate U9.

1.4.12 Thermostat Differential Changeover

Differential value during thermostat ON/OFF control can be changed.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 1ºC
12 (22) 2
02 0.5ºC
1.4.13 Auto Restart after Power Failure Reset

Mode First Second
Contents
01 Disabled
12 (22) 5
02 Enabled
For the air conditioners with no setting for the function, the units will be left in the stop condition
when the power supply is reset automatically after power failure reset or the main power supply
is turned ON again after once turned OFF. However, for the air conditioners with the setting
(same as factory setting), the units may start automatically after power failure reset or the main
power supply turned ON again (return to the same operation condition as that of before power
failure).
For the above reasons, when the unit is set enabling to utilize “Auto restart function after power
failure reset”, utmost care should be paid for the occurrence of the following situation.
Caution The air conditioner starts operation suddenly after power failure reset or
when the main power supply is turned on again. Consequently, the user
might be surprised and wonder why this has happened. In service work, for
example, turning off the main power switch while the unit is in operation,
and turning on the switch again after the work is completed start unit
operation (the fan rotates).
1.4.14 Airflow Setting when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

This is used to set airflow to "LL airflow" when cooling thermostat is OFF.
Mode First Second
01 LL tap
12 (22) 6
02 Set fan speed

1.4.15 Compensating the Floor Temperature (Cooling)

(For units with the infrared presence/floor sensor)
Offset the detected value of the infrared presence/floor sensor with a certain temperature. This
setting should be used to have the actual floor temperature detected when, for example, the unit
is installed close to a wall.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 4°C
02 2°C
12 (22) 11
03 0°C
04 –2°C
Specific usages of this setting

There is no problem with the standard setting in the usual condition. Change the setting in the
cases indicated in the following table.
Operation
Environment Problem Contents
Mode
-The unit is installed close to a wall or a Insufficient cooling –2°C
window.
-High thermal capacity of the floor (such as
concrete, etc). Cooling
-There are many heat sources including PC. Excessive cooling 2°C or 4°C
-There is a non-negligible heat source such as
floor heating.
Note(s) This setting is available only in cooling operation.
1.4.16 Ceiling Height Setting, Setting of Normal Airflow

Make the following setting according to the ceiling height. The second code No. is set to 01 at
the factory.
 FXFSQ25-80
Ceiling Height
No. Code No. Code No. All round 4-way 3-way 2-way
outlet Outlets Outlets Outlets
Lower Lower Lower Lower
01 Standard than than than than
2.7 m 3.1 m 3.0 m 3.5 m
13
0 High Lower than Lower than Lower than Lower than
(23) 02
Ceiling(1) 3.0 m 3.4 m 3.3 m 3.8 m
03 High Lower than Lower than Lower than —

Ceiling(2) 3.5 m 4.0 m 3.5 m
 FXFSQ100-140
Ceiling Height
Mode First Second
Contents All round 4-way 3-way 2-way
outlet Outlets Outlets Outlets
Lower Lower Lower Lower
01 Standard than than than than
3.2 m 3.4 m 3.6 m 4.2 m
13
0 High Lower than Lower than Lower than Lower than
(23) 02
Ceiling(1) 3.6 m 3.9 m 4.0 m 4.2 m
High Lower than Lower than Lower than
03 —
Ceiling(2) 4.2 m 4.5 m 4.2 m
Note(s) 1. The Second Code No. is factory set to Standard/All-direction airflow. For High ceiling (1) or
(2), initial setting by remote controller is required.
2. A closing member kit (optional) is required for 4-, 3-, or 2-direction airflow.

 FXFSQ with Designer panel

Mode First Second FXFSQ25-80 FXFSQ100-140
Contents
No. Code No. Code No. (All round outlet) (All round outlet)
Lower than Lower than
01 Standard
2.4 m 3.2 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (1) Lower than Lower than

2.7 m 3.6 m
Lower than Lower than
03 High Ceiling (2)
3.2 m 4.2 m
 FXAQ
Mode First Code Second
No. No. Code No. Contents
01 Standard
13 (23) 0 02 Slightly higher
03 High
1.4.17 Airflow Direction Setting

Set the airflow direction of indoor units as given in the table below. (Set when sealing material
kit of air discharge outlet has been installed.) The second code No. is factory set to 01.
Mode First Second
01 F: 4-direction airflow

13 (23) 1 02 T: 3-direction airflow
03 W: 2-direction airflow
1.4.18 Swing Pattern Settings

Set the flap operation in swing mode.
With the factory swing, flaps facing each other are synchronized to operate, and flaps placed
side by side are set to swing in an opposite direction to agitate airflow to reduce temperature
irregularity.
Conventional swing operation (all direction synchronized swing) can be set onsite.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 All direction synchronized swing
13 (23) 2 02 —
03 Facing swing

1.4.19 Airflow Direction Adjustment Range

Make the following airflow direction setting according to the respective purpose.
 FXFSQ-AR, FXAQ-P : Factory setting

01 Draft prevention (upward)
13 (23) 4 02 Standard
03 Ceiling soiling prevention (downward)
Note(s) 1. Some indoor unit models are not equipped with draft prevention (upward) function.
2. When the model FXFSQ is attached with a closing member kit, set the Second Code No. to
02 or 03.
1.4.20 External Static Pressure Settings

 FXMQ-PB
Mode First Second
01 30 Pa (2) (3)
02 50 Pa
03 60 Pa
04 70 Pa
05 80 Pa
06 90 Pa
07 100 Pa
13 (23) 6 08 110 Pa
09 120 Pa
10 130 Pa
11 140 Pa
12 150 Pa (3)
13 160 Pa (3)
14 180 Pa (1) (3)
15 200 Pa (1) (3)
1 FXMQ40PB cannot be set to 180 or 200 Pa.
2 FXMQ50/63/80/100/125PB cannot be set to 30 Pa.
3 FXMQ140PB cannot be set to 30 Pa and 150-200 Pa.

1.4.21 Setting of Swing Patterns when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

In cooling operation, when the airflow direction is set to swing, flaps swing even when the
thermostat is OFF. This setting allows to change the airflow direction when the thermostat is
OFF.
Mode First Second
Fixed Swing
01 Set Position Swing
02 Set Position P0
03 P0 P0
13 (23) 7 04 Set Position Swing
05 Set Position P2
06 P2 P2
07 Set Position Swing
1.4.22 Setting of Circulation Airflow

This is to set whether the circulation airflow function is enabled or disabled.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Disabled
13 (23) 13
02 Enabled
1.4.23 Circulation Airflow Patterns

This setting is to change the appearance pattern of the circulation airflow direction depending
on the installation environment of the indoor unit.
Cooling
(a) (b) (c) (d)
Movement pattern
01: Pattern 1 120 600 120 600

Appearance
Time (sec.) 02: Pattern 2 120 600 0 0
03: Pattern 3 0 0 120 600
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 600 120 600
Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (where the flap is
reversed).
1.4.24 Switching Panel Type

 FXFSQ-AR
Change this setting depending on the type of the panel connected.
01 Standard panel
13 (23) 15
02 Designer panel

1.4.25 Direct Duct Connection

This is used when "fresh air intake kit equipped with fan" is connected. The indoor fan carries
out residual operation for 1 minute after the thermostat is stopped. (For the purpose of
preventing dust on the air filter from falling off.)
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Not equipped
15 (25) 2
02 Equipped
1.4.26 Drain Pump and Humidifier Interlock Selection

This is used to interlock the humidifier with the drain pump. When water is drained out of the
unit, this setting is unnecessary.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Not interlocked
15 (25) 3
02 Interlocked
1.4.27 Individual Ventilation Setting

This is set to perform individual operation of heat reclaim ventilation using the remote controller/
central unit when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.
(Switch only when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.)
Mode First Second
Contents
01 — (Normal) 
15 (25) 5
02 Individual
1.4.28 Display of Error Codes on the Remote Controller

 For BRC1E Series only
Error code (four digits) is displayed for limited products. Select two-digit display if four-digit
display is not preferred.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 ―
02 Two-digit display
1b 4
03 ―
04 Four-digit display
1.4.29 Key-Lock Pattern Settings

 For BRC1E series only
Setting of key-lock pattern for the remote controller.
01 No operation allowed. (Cancel procedure is displayed)
02 No operation allowed. (Cancel procedure is displayed)
1b 12
03 No menu operation is allowed.
04 No menu operation is allowed any time.
 When the Second code No. is set to 04, no menu operation is allowed without key-lock by
pressing and holding the menu button. Set the Second code No. to other than 04 to cancel it.

1.4.30 Setting Restricted/Permitted for Airflow Block

 For Sensing flow type only
Due to possibility of dew condensation, the airflow block function cannot be enabled when
closure material kit, fresh air intake kit, natural / separately installed evaporation humidifier, or
branch air duct.
This setting will prevent the airflow block is advertently set to ON.
Ensure that this setting is "Disable airflow block" when using together with options listed above.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Airflow block permitted
02 —
1b 14 03 —
04 —
05 Airflow block restricted
1.4.31 Room Temperature Display

 For BRC1E series only
A "Detailed display screen" can be selected as the display screen. This setting is used if you do
not want to display "Room temperature display" on the "Detailed display screen".
Mode First Second
01 Not displayed
1c 0
02 Displayed

1.5 Operation Control Mode

The operation control mode is compatible with a variety of controls and operations by limiting
the functions of the operation remote controller. Furthermore, operations such as remote
controller ON/OFF can be limited in accordance with the combination conditions. (Refer to
information on the next page.)
Central remote controller is normally available for operations. (Except when centralized monitor
is connected)
Contents of Control Modes

20 modes consisting of combinations of the following 5 operation modes with temperature and
operation mode setting by remote controller can be set and displayed by operation modes 0
through 19.
 ON/OFF control impossible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by central remote controller only.
(Cannot be turned ON/OFF by remote controller.)
 OFF control only possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON by central remote controller only, and OFF by remote controller
only.
 Centralized
Used when you want to turn ON by central remote controller only, and turn ON/OFF freely by
remote controller during set time.
 Individual
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by both central remote controller and remote controller.
 Timer operation possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by remote controller during set time and you do not want
to start operation by central remote controller when time of system start is programmed.

How to Select Operation Mode

Whether operation by remote controller will be possible or not for turning ON/OFF, controlling
temperature or setting operation mode is selected and decided by the operation mode given on
the right edge of the table below.
Example
ON by remote OFF by remote
Temperature Operation mode
controller controller OFF by Control
control by setting by
(Unified ON by (Unified OFF by remote mode is "1".
remote controller remote controller
central remote central remote controller
controller) controller)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Rejection Rejection Rejection Acceptance Acceptance
Control by remote controller
Operation
Control mode Unified operation, Unified OFF, Control mode

individual operation by individual stop by Temperature Operation
OFF
central remote central remote control mode setting
controller, or operation controller, or timer
controlled by timer stop
Acceptance 0
Rejection
ON/OFF control Rejection 10
Rejection
impossible by Acceptance
(Example) 1 (Example)
remote controller Acceptance (Example)
(Example)
Rejection (Example) Rejection 11
Acceptance 2
Rejection
OFF control only Rejection 12
Rejection (Example)
possible by remote
controller Acceptance 3
Acceptance
Rejection 13
Acceptance 4
Rejection
Rejection 14
Centralized
Acceptance 5
Acceptance
Rejection 15
Acceptance Acceptance
Acceptance 6
Rejection
Rejection 16
Individual Acceptance
Acceptance 7
Acceptance
Rejection 17
Acceptance 8
Rejection
Timer operation Acceptance (During Rejection (During Rejection 18
possible by remote timer at ON position timer at OFF
controller only) position only) Acceptance 9
Acceptance
Rejection 19
Do not select “timer operation possible by remote controller” if not using a remote controller.
Operation by timer is impossible in this case.
BRC1E62, BRC1E63
Local remote controllers cannot set
temperature or operation mode when
the system is under centralized control
and CENTRAL CONTROL is displayed
on the screen.

Field Settings for Outdoor Unit SiAF341904E
2. Field Settings for Outdoor Unit

This section shows a list of field setting items possible to set at time of initial startup. For details
of DIP switch setting, setting mode ("mode 2") and monitoring mode ("mode 1"), refer to
information on the following pages.
2.1 Function Setting

Following setting may be required to set to comply to specific application requirements.
Setting item Contents and objective of setting Overview of setting procedure
Setting of low A.To reduce operation noise level through reduction of the upper Use the optional board DTA104A61 (1).
noise limit of the fan using external input (use outdoor fan step 8 for Set mode 2 No. 12-1.
operation normal operation). Choose level by mode 2 No. 25.
(2) 1. Level 1: fan step 7Y or less. If required, set the Capacity priority setting
2. Level 2: fan step 6 or less. to ON, by mode 2 No. 29-1.
3. Level 3: fan step 6 or less.
4. Level 4: fan step 5 or less.
B.To perform automatic night-time low noise operation. Select required level by mode 2-22.
Start time: selectable from 8:00 PM to 12:00 AM (step by 2 hours). Select start time with mode 2-26.
End time: selectable from 6:00 AM to 8:00 AM (step by 1 hour). Select end time with mode 2-27.
(Note that the set time is estimated according to outdoor air Select capacity priority setting if required by
temperature.) mode 2-29-1.
Setting of 1. Demand 1 Level 1: 60% of rated capacity or less Use the optional board DTA104A61.
demand 2. Demand 1 Level 2: 65% of rated capacity or less Wire external signal(s) to the optional
operation (2) 3. Demand 1 Level 3: 70% of rated capacity or less adaptor DTA104A61.
4. Demand 1 Level 4: 75% of rated capacity or less
5. Demand 1 Level 5: 80% of rated capacity or less Activate input optional board DTA104A61
6. Demand 1 Level 6: 85% of rated capacity or less mode 2 No. 12-1.
7. Demand 1 Level 7: 90% of rated capacity or less Select level of demand 1 by mode 2-30.
8. Demand 1 Level 8: 95% of rated capacity or less Select level of demand 2 by mode 2-31.
9. Demand 2 Level 1: 40% of rated capacity or less If fixed demand control is required (without
10. Demand 2 Level 2: 50% of rated capacity or less adaptor DTA104A61), set level by mode 232.
11. Demand 2 Level 3: 55% of rated capacity or less
12. Demand 3: Forced thermostat off
Setting of Make AIRNET address when it is connected to AIRNET Set AIRNET address with mode 2-13.
AIRNET monitoring, or to view detail in the map on Service Checker type
address III.
High level Required setting when level difference between outdoor and Set mode 2 No. 49 to 1 if outdoor is more
difference indoor units of same refrigerant exceeds standard level. than 50 m above indoor unit.
outdoor to
indoor
Setting of high Set high static pressure in order to operate the system with duct Set mode 2 No. 18 to 1 (ON).
static pressure to the outdoor unit (used at concealed installation on floors or
balconies).
Evaporating Setting to choose the reaction time of outdoor control on change Set mode 2 No. 8 to choose cooling
temperature of outdoor and cooling indoor load. capacity control logic between fixed, automatic
setting (cooling or high sensible.
performance) Set mode 2 No. 81 to choose Te adjustment
at start up between Powerful, Quick, Mild or
Eco.
Eco mode Eco mode may be deemed unavailable. Set mode 2-23.
invalid setting 0: Valid
1: Invalid
When this configuration is set, it is not possible to turn this control
ON/OFF using the external control adaptor.
Eco level You may set the Eco level of Eco mode to Standard/Low or You need an external control adaptor. Using
setting for Eco make it unavailable. Depending on the settings, low noise mode 2-11, define if Eco level will be set by
mode by operation or demand operation may not be performed using the the external control adaptor low noise level or
external external control adaptor. demand level. If you short-circuit the terminal
control adaptor (TeS1), Eco level can be set to Standard/Low.
In case of open circuit, the setting will be
unavailable.
For detailed description about each setting, refer to Details of Setting Mode (m2) on page 143.
Note(s) 1. External control adaptor for outdoor unit.

2. These functions are available when setting mode 2 No.11 to 0.

SiAF341904E Field Settings for Outdoor Unit
2.2 Settings by DIP Switches

For factory mounted board only.
DIP switch
Setting item Description
No. Setting
DS1-1 ON Do not change the factory settings.
~DS1-4 Not used
OFF (Factory setting)

2.2.1 DIP Switch Setting Mounting a Spare PCB

Caution:
 After replacement with spare PCB, be sure to make settings shown in the table below. The
procedure for making settings of spare PCB is different from that used for factory settings
described above. Be sure to refer to the table on the following page in order to make settings
of spare PCB after replacement.
 Enforce a re-initialization of communication: hold press button BS3 “RETURN” for minimum
5 seconds.
 After initialization, a test operation is required from outdoor unit (hold BS2 “SET” until
indication “t01” appears).
(3) BS button (BS1~BS3) (2) Segment display (SEG1~SEG3)
(4)
DIP switch
(DS1-1~4)
(DS2-1~4)
(1)
Microcomputer
normal monitor
(HAP)
Connection terminal
for transmission use
Initial position ON ON
of DIP switches Position
OFF 1 2 3 4 OFF 1 2 3 4 Set switch
DS1 DS2
(1) Microcomputer normal monitor

This monitor blinks while in normal operation, and turns ON or OFF when an error occurs.
(2) 7 segment display
· Used to check the transmission.
· Used to display the transmission state between indoor and outdoor units.
· Used to display the contents of error.
· Used to display the contents of field setting.
(3) BS button
Used to change mode.
(4) DIP switch
Used to make field settings.

The figure below shows the required position of the DIP switches on spare PCB for RXQ-A.
Change DIP switches at time of power disconnected.
Application The setting method (represents the position of switches)
model
RXQ6/8A Set DS1-2, DS1-3, DS1-4 and DS2-2 to ON.
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
RXQ10A Set DS1-2, DS1-3, DS1-4, DS2-1 and DS2-2 to ON.

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
RXQ12A Set DS1-2, DS1-3, DS1-4 and DS2-3 to ON.

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
RXQ14A Set DS1-2, DS1-3, DS1-4, DS2-1 and DS2-3 to ON.

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
RXQ16/18A Set DS1-2, DS1-3, DS1-4, DS2-2 and DS2-3 to ON.

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
RXQ20A Set DS1-2, DS1-3, DS1-4 and DS2-4 to ON.

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2

2.3 Settings by BS Buttons

The following settings can be made using the BS buttons on the PCB.
In case of a multi outdoor system, make these settings with the master outdoor unit (settings
made with a slave unit are disabled).
BS buttons 7 segment display (SEG1-3)
BS1 BS2 BS3 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
MODE SET RETURN Normal mode

(TEST) (RESET)
Used to make Used to make Setting mode

setting mode field settings.
changes.
Monitor mode
 Normal mode:
 Blank: If no abnormality is detected and initialization of communication was completed.
 Flashing combination of letter and number (4 digits): Error code detected by outdoor
control or trouble by communication.
 Setting mode: Used to make changes to operating status, performance settings or address
setting.
 Monitor mode: Used to verify contents of settings, quantity of units, current value of some
parameters during operation of outdoor unit.
 Mode changing procedure can be selected using the MODE (BS1) button as shown
below:
Press and hold the
MODE (BS1) button Press the MODE
for 5 seconds or more (BS1) button once
Setting mode Normal mode Monitor mode
Press the MODE
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 (BS1) button once SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3

 Selection between normal mode, monitor mode (Mode 1) and setting mode (Mode 2).
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Press MODE (BS1) button for more than 5 sec. Normal mode Press MODE (BS1) button once.
(Initial condition)
Setting mode (Mode 2) Monitor mode (Mode 1)
Setting item selection Check item selection

(SET) (SET)
Press RETURN (BS3) Press RETURN (BS3)
button once. button once.
Setting condition
Contents display
selection (SET)
Press RETURN (BS3) Press RETURN (BS3)
button once. button once.
Setting condition
(Contents) display
Press RETURN (BS3)
button once. Press MODE (BS1)
button once.
Press MODE (BS1)

button once.

2.4 Normal Mode

1. Indoor/outdoor transmission status: Used to check for the initial status of indoor/outdoor
transmission.
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Blinking
Initializing
ON
OFF
Initializing completed
2. Descriptions: Used to display an error content.

SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Normal
Example: E7-01
Error Error main code

Switching
every
second
Error sub code

2.5 Monitor Mode (Mode 1)

In the monitor mode, information can be retrieved about settings related to performance,
addresses, number of units and actual operation data.
2.5.1 Retrieve data by using BS button outdoor unit main PCB

SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Normal
To enter monitor mode, press the
MODE (BS1) button while in BS1
normal mode.
MODE
Selecting monitoring item
Press the SET (BS2) button to set BS2

the 7 segment display to any of the
monitoring items listed in the table below. SET
BS3
Checking for description of data
Press the RETURN (BS3) button. RETURN

Data on the monitoring item selected will
appear on the 7 segment display.
BS3
RETURN
Press the RETURN (BS3) button to
set monitor mode to the initial state.
BS1
MODE
Press the MODE (BS1) button will return Normal
the mode to normal mode.
∗ If you lose setting in progress,

press the MODE (BS1) button.
You should return to normal mode.
Legend Segment : OFF : ON : BLINKS : hold 5 seconds

2.5.2 Overview of Monitor Mode (Mode 1)

Item Contents
No. Display Display
1 Description Description
SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG
1 2 3 1 2 3
Master/slave outdoor unit Undefined -
Master unit 0
0 1. 0 0
Slave 1 unit 1
Slave 2 unit 2
Low noise operation state In normal operation 0
1 1. 0 1
display In low noise operation 1
Demand operation state In normal operation In 0
2 1. 0 2
display demand operation 1
Automatic backup OFF 0
3 operation setting 1. 0 3 ON 1
Te setting Normal 6°C 2
High sensible 7°C 3
5 1. 0 5
Low noise/demand Possible 0-31 0
8 1. 0 8
address 3 1
AIRNET address Possible 0-63 0
9 1. 0 9
6 3
Number of connected Possible 0-63 0
10 indoor units (refer to 2) 1. 1 0 6 3
Number of outdoor units Possible 0-63 0
13 1. 1 3
(refer to 3) 6 3
Number of units in zone Possible 0-63 0
15 1. 1 5
6 3
Number of all indoor units Possible 0-128 0
of several systems if “F1F2 1 2 8
16 1. 1 6
OUT/D is wired between
systems (refer to 4)
17 Description of error (latest) 1. 1 7 Refer to information in Check for
Descriptions of Errors/Retries on page
Description of error 138.
18 1. 1 8
(1 cycle before)
19 Description of error 1. 1 9
(2 cycles before)
1: Numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the BS button.
2: Number of indoor units connected: represents the number of indoor units connected to a
single outdoor system.
3: Number of outdoor units: represents the number of outdoor units connected to a single DIII-
NET that is a communication line.
4: Number of terminal units: represents the number of indoor units connected to a single DIII-
NET that is a communication line.

Item Contents
No. Display Display
1 Description Description
SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG
1 2 3 1 2 3
Description of retry Refer to information in Check for
23 1. 2 3
(latest) Descriptions of Errors/Retries on page
138.
Description of retry
24 1. 2 4
(1 cycle before)
25 Description of retry 1. 2 5
(2 cycles before)
Number of outdoor units Possible 0-63
0
28 connected in a multi 1. 2 8
system 6 3
Outdoor unit PCB status 0: judgment in

0
judgment process
32 1. 3 2 1: normal 1
2
2: abnormal
Number of abnormal Possible 0-15 0
status judgment outdoor 1 5
33 1. 3 3
unit PCB
Cooling comfort setting Possible 0-3 0

40 1. 4 0
(see mode 2-81) 3
High pressure (MPa) Possible 0.1-9.99 0. 1 0
42 1. 4 2 9. 9 9
Low pressure (MPa) Possible 0.1-9.99 0. 1 0
43 1. 4 3
9. 9 9
Compressor total 0 0 0
44 1. 4 4 0-999
frequency (Hz) 9 9 9
Discharge pipe - 9 9
46 temperature (°C) (Tdi1) 1. 4 6 –99-999 9 9 9
Discharge pipe - 9 9
47 1. 4 7 –99-999
temperature (°C) (Tdi2) 9 9 9
Compressor body - 9 9
48 1. 4 8 –99-999
temperature (°C) (Ti1) 9 9 9
Compressor body - 9 9
49 temperature (°C) (Ti2) 1. 4 9 –99-999 9 9 9
Outdoor air temperature - 9 9
50 1. 5 0 –99-999
(°C) (Ta) 9 9 9
51 Compressor suction 1. 5 1 –99-999 - 9 9

temperature (°C) (Ts) 9 9 9
Subcooling heat
- 9 9
52 exchanger gas pipe 1. 5 2 –99-999 9 9 9
temperature (°C) (Tsh)
Compressor operation 0 0 0
54 1. 5 4 0-999
(hours/100) 9 9 9
1: Numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the BS button.

2.5.3 Check for Descriptions of Errors/Retries

Follow the procedure described below. This procedure is different than indicated in previous
“Monitor mode”.
The error codes for forced stop outdoor or retry are item:
 17, 18, 19: description of error (outdoor system stopped operation).
 23, 24, 25: description of retry.
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Normal
To enter "monitor mode", press the
MODE (BS1) button while in BS1
"normal mode".
MODE
Selecting error/retry item
Press the SET (BS2) button to set BS2

the 7 segment display to any of the
error or retry items listed in the table
below. SET
Displaying check 1
Press the RETURN (BS3) button. BS3

Error (Retry) codes will appear on the
7 segment display.
RETURN
BS2 Press
SET (BS2)
button. Displaying check 2
SET
Press the SET (BS2) button. BS2
Detailed error (retry) codes will appear on
the 7 segment display.
SET
BS3
Press the RETURN (BS3) button to set RETURN

"Monitoring mode" to the initial state.
BS1
Pressing the MODE (BS1) button will MODE

return the mode to "normal mode".
Normal
 The tables on next pages show a full list of possible error codes displayed on the 3 digit 7
segment display of the outdoor unit. The error code contains an upper and lower digit. To
scroll between upper and lower error digit, use the SET (BS2) button when the select
number in the monitoring mode is chosen:
 No. 17-19 for error: System operation stopped.
 No. 23-25 for retry: System attempts to keep operation.
 The errors cover problems detected in the outdoor unit or the communication.
 Errors detected on the indoor unit are not shown on the outdoor display. For inspecting error
code on indoor unit, please consult:
 Display of the remote controller connected to the indoor units.
 If there are no remote controllers, there should be a central control device set up. Prior to
start up, make the necessary group number settings on each indoor unit.
Reference Refer to page 171 for Error Codes and Descriptions.

2.6 Setting Mode (Mode 2)

Press and hold the MODE (BS1) SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
button for 5 seconds or more and
set to “Setting mode”.
Normal
BS1
Selection of setting items MODE

Press the SET (BS2) button and set
the 7 segment display to a setting
item shown in the table below.
Press the RETURN (BS3) button

and decide the item. (The present BS2
setting condition is blinked.)
SET
BS3
RETURN
Selection of setting conditions
Default
Press the SET (BS2) button and set
to the setting condition you want.

and decide the condition. BS2
SET
BS3
RETURN
and set to the initial status of
“Setting mode”.
BS3
RETURN
BS1
Press the MODE (BS1) button to MODE

return to “Normal mode”.
Normal
∗ If you become unsure of how to
proceed, press the MODE (BS1)
button and return to “Normal mode”.

2.6.1 Overview of Setting Mode (Mode 2)

This overview shows the available settings by using the press buttons on the outdoor unit PCB.
Item Contents
Display Display
No.
Description SEG SEG SEG Description SEG SEG SEG
1 2 3 1 2 3
0 Do not change contents. 2. 0 0 — — — —
Low noise/ Used to make address setting for low Address:
2 demand address noise/demand address. 2. 0 2 0~ 0
31 3 1
Indoor fan Used to force the fan of indoor unit to H Normal operation 0
5 forced H tap. 2. 0 5 Indoor fan H 1
Forced Used to force all indoor units to operate Normal operation 0
6 2. 0 6
thermostat ON forced thermostat ON. Forced thermostat ON 1
Te setting Used to make setting of targeted Standard: 6°C 2
evaporating temperature for cooling High sensible: 7°C 3
operation. High sensible: 8°C 4
8 2. 0 8
High sensible: 9°C 5
Eco setting is available from an external input.
When this configuration is set, it is not possible to turn the
Eco refrigerant control ON/OFF using the remote Unavailable 0
11 controller. Also, depending on the settings, low noise 2. 1 1 Low noise level input 1
operation or demand operation may not be performed Demand input 2
using the external control adaptor.
External low Used to receive external low noise or Input LNO/DE

noise/demand demand signal. OFF 0
12 2. 1 2
setting ON 1
AIRNET Used to set address of AIRNET Address:

13 address 2. 1 3 0~ 0
63 6 3
High EST for High external static pressure setting for OFF 0
18 2. 1 8
outdoor fan outdoor fan ON 1
Refrigerant Used to set the system to refrigerant Refrigerant recovery
21 recovery/ recovery mode (without compressor 2. 2 1 OFF 0
vacuuming run). ON 1
Automatic night- Automatic night-time low noise OFF 0
time low noise operation. Time for the operation is Level 1 1
22 operation subject to the start and end time 2. 2 2 Level 2 2
settings. Level 3 3
Level 4 4
Used to set Eco mode invalid.
When this configuration is set, it is not possible to turn the Valid 0
23 Eco mode ON/OFF using the external control adaptor. 2. 2 3 Invalid 1

Item Contents
Display Display
No.
1 2 3 1 2 3
External night- Low noise level when the external low Level 1 1
25 time low noise noise signal is input at option 2. 2 5 Level 2 2
operation level DTA104A61. Level 3 3
Level 4 4
Automatic night- Time to start automatic “night-time low About 8:00 PM 1
26 time low noise noise” operation. (“Night-time low noise” 2. 2 6 About 10:00 PM 2
operation start level setting should also be made.) About 12:00 AM 3
Automatic night- Time to stop automatic “night-time low About 6:00 AM 1
27 time low noise noise” operation. (“Night-time low noise” 2. 2 7 About 7:00 AM 2
operation stop level setting should also be made.) About 8:00 AM 3
Power transistor Used to troubleshoot DC compressor.
check Inverter waveforms are output without
wire connections to the compressor. It is OFF 0
28 2. 2 8
useful to determine whether the relevant ON (10 Hz) 1
trouble has resulted from the
compressor or inverter PCB.
Capacity priority Cancel the low noise level control if
capacity is required while low noise
operation or night-time low noise OFF 0
29 2. 2 9
operation is in progress. ON 1
Demand 1 Used to make a change to the targeted Level 1 (60%) 1

setting power consumption level when the Level 2 (65%) 2
demand 1 control signal is inputted. Level 3 (70%) 3
Level 4 (75%) 4
30 2. 3 0 Level 5 (80%) 5
Level 6 (85%) 6
Level 7 (90%) 7
Level 8 (95%) 8
Demand 2 Used to use a targeted power current Level 1 (40%) 1
31 setting level when the demand 2 control signal 2. 3 1 Level 2 (50%) 2
is inputted. Level 3 (55%) 3
Constant Used to set constant demand 1 or 2 OFF 0
32 demand setting control without inputting any external 2. 3 2 Demand 1 (2-30) 1
signal. Demand 2 (2-31) 2
Emergency To prohibit a compressor or complete in OFF 0
operation “Master”. Since module is permanent Master M1C OFF 1
38 2. 3 8
(master) disabled, immediately replace the Master M2C OFF 2
defective component(s). Master unit OFF 3
Emergency To prohibit a compressor or complete OFF 0
operation “Slave 1”. Since module is permanent Slave 1 M1C OFF 1
39 2. 3 9
(slave 1) disabled, immediately replace the Slave 1 M2C OFF 2
defective component(s). Slave 1 unit OFF 3
Emergency To prohibit a compressor or complete OFF 0
40 operation “Slave 2”. Since module is permanent 2. 4 0 Slave 2 M1C OFF 1
(slave 2) disabled, immediately replace the Slave 2 M2C OFF 2
defective component(s). Slave 2 unit OFF 3

Item Contents
Display Display
No.
1 2 3 1 2 3
Outdoor > 50 m Height difference setting max. 90 m. OFF (max. 50 m) 0
49 2. 4 9
above indoor ON (max. 90 m) 1
Sequence multi Sequence addressing between master Automatic 0
outdoor and slave units. Forced master 1
51 2. 5 1
Forded slave 1 2
Forced slave 2 3
VRTsmart Used to change upper limit of target Low 1 0
control evaporation temperature in VRTsmart Low 2 1
Te upper limit control. Low 3 2
Low 4 3
76 2. 7 6
Low 5 4
Low 6 5
Standard 6
High 7
VRT control Used to change upper limit of target
Te upper limit evaporation temperature in VRT Standard 4
78 control. 2. 7 8 High 6
Cooling comfort Cooling comfort setting ECO 0

setting Mild 1
81 2. 8 1
Quick 2
Powerful 3
Master remote control setting when mix combination VRV indoor 0
83 2. 8 3 — —
RA indoor 1
Indoor unit Possible for operate system when
without power some indoor units are temporary Disabled 0
90 without power supply. 2. 9 0 Enabled 1
Eco level setting for VRTsmart Standard 0

95 2. 9 5 Middle 1
High 2
: Setting does not return to factory setting when exit mode 2. To cancel the function, change
setting manually to factory setting.
: Once function is activated “t01” appears. To stop current function, press Return (BS3) button
once.
For detailed description about each setting, refer to Details of Setting Mode (m2) on page 143.
Indication bold means factory setting.

2.6.2 Details of Setting Mode (m2)

 m2-2: Low noise/demand address: address for low noise/demand operation.
 1 or more systems (maximum 10 systems wired by “F1F2 OUT/D”) can operate use the
LNO (Low Noise Operation) or/and the DE (Demand Control) by instruction of field
supplied input to optional board DTA104A61/62.
 To link the system to the corresponding DTA104A61/62, set the address same as the
DIP switches position on the related optional board DTA104A61/62.
 Ensure that also field setting 2-12-1 is set to enable input from optional board
DTA104A61/62.
 m2-5: Cross wiring check.

 Default value: 0. Not active.
 Set 1: force all connected indoor units (except VKM) to operate the indoor fan on high
speed. This setting can be made to check which units are missing in the communication
if the number of indoor units do not correspond to the system lay out. Ensure that after
cross wiring check was confirmed, to return setting to default 2-5-0. Once setting 2-5-1 is
active, it is not automatically returning to default when exit mode 2.
 m2-6: Forced thermostat ON command all connected indoor units.

 Set 1: force all connected indoor units to operate under “Test” (forced thermostat ON
command to outdoor). Ensure that when the forced thermostat ON needs to be ended, to
return setting to default 26-0. Once setting 2-6-1 is active, it is not automatically returning
to default when exit mode 2.
 m2-8: Te target temperature for cooling operation. Change the setting in function of required
operation method during cooling.
 Default value: 2 (Te target: 6°C). The refrigerant temperature is fixed to average indoor
evaporating temperature of 6°C, independent from the situation. It corresponds to the
standard operation which is known and can be expected from/under previous VRV
systems.
 Set 3-7: High Sensible. The refrigerant temperature is set higher/lower in cooling
compared to basic operation. The focus under high sensible mode is comfort feeling for
the customer. The selection method of indoor units is important and has to be considered
as the available capacity is not the same as under basic operation. Activate this setting
under cooling operation.
set 2-8 Te target
2 6°C (default)
3 7°C
4 8°C
5 9°C
6 10°C
7 11°C
 m2-12: Enable input “DTA104A61”: enable the low noise function and/or power
consumption limitation. If the system needs to be running under low noise operation or under
power consumption limitation conditions when an external signal is sent to the unit, this
setting should be changed. This setting will only be effective when the optional external
control adaptor for outdoor unit (DTA104A61/62) is installed and the address set by DIP
switches on DTA104A61/62 corresponds to the address set on the outdoor unit(s) – set 2-.
 Default value: 0.
 To enable input from DTA104A61/62 change to 2-12-1.
 m2-13: AIRNET address.

 When an AIRNET system will be used, outdoor unit needs an AIRNET address.
 Also to facilitate the recognition of a system in the map lay out of the service checker type
III, set each system a unique address between 1 and 63.
 When duplicating of AIRNET address, UC error code will appear on central control.

 m2-21: Refrigerant recovery / vacuuming.

 Default value: 0. Recovery mode not active.
 Set 1: outdoor and indoor electronic expansion valves are opened fully (except EV3 for
PCM vessel). Compressor(s) do not operate.
 All controllers show “Test” and LED operation-ON, but indoor and outdoor fan do not
operate.
 Outdoor segment display indicates t01.
 By opening indoor and outdoor electronic expansion valves there is a free pathway to
reclaim remaining refrigerant out by using a refrigerant recovery unit to a refrigerant
recovery bottle.
 Prior to launch the recovery mode, ensure:
To vacuum all lines between service hoses – refrigerant recovery unit and recovery
bottle.
Weight the refrigerant recovery bottle to know recovered amount when refrigerant
recovery function is terminated.
 To end the refrigerant recovery mode, press BS3 button once. The 7 segment display
returns to normal (all off).
 m2-22: Selection automatic night-time low noise operation level. The outdoor can switch
automatically to a pre-set night-time low noise operation level during night time judgement.
 Default value: 0. Auto night-time low noise operation not active.
 Set 1: use level 1.
 Set period: refer to set 2-26 for start time and 2-27 for end time.
 m2-25: Night-time low noise operation level when using external input to optional board
DTA104A61/62.
 If the system needs to be running under low noise operation conditions when an external
signal is sent to the unit, this setting defines the level of low noise that will be applied.
 This setting will only be effective when the optional external control adaptor for outdoor
unit DTA104A61/62 is installed and the setting is enabled (mode 2-12-1).
 When night-time low noise operation is actually performed, conditions if visible in mode 1
– code 1.
 The night-time low noise operation will not be performed in one of following conditions:
 Startup of system, or
 During oil return, or
 30 minutes after external input opened, or
 Capacity priority setting is active (refer to mode 2-29-1) and limit condition is met.
 Default value: 2 (level 2)
 Night-time low noise operation level can be selected to 1, 2, 3 or 4 (field setting 2-25-1, 2,
3, 4).

 m2-26: Start time automatic night-time low noise operation. When the auto night-time low
noise operation is active (refer to field setting 2-22) outdoor will start when start time is
reached time is reached. The time judgement is taken from outdoor air tendency.
*When the outdoor air temperature becomes highest,
the unit is sensed as 2:00 PM
Capability%
100
50
Load%
0
Night mode
ends
58
Max.8 dB reduced
sound dB
Operation
(10 HP)
50
8:00 AM 12:00 PM 4:00 PM 8:00 PM 12:00 AM 4:00 AM 8:00 AM
Night mode
starts
 Default value: 2 (10:00 PM)

 Field setting 1: 8:00 PM, 3: 12:00 AM (midnight).
 m2-27: Stop time automatic night-time low noise operation. When the auto night-time low
noise operation is active (refer to field setting 2-22), outdoor unit will stop the night-time low
noise operation level automatically when stop time is reached.
 Default value: 3 (8:00 AM)
 Field setting 1: 6:00 AM, 2: 7:00 AM
 m2-28: Power transistor check mode. To evaluate the output of the power transistors. Use
this function in case error code is displayed related to defective inverter PCB or inverter
compressor is locked.
 Default value: 0. Power transistor check mode is not active.
 Field setting 1: Power transistor check mode is active.
Function:
 Inverter PCB gives output of 10 Hz in sequence by all 6 transistors. Remove the U/V/
W terminals of the inverter compressor, and connect to the inverter checker module.
If all 6 LEDs blink, the transistors switch correctly.
 When the power transistor check mode is interrupted, after internal power circuit is
disconnected on the inverter PCB, 2 LEDs will light up to indicate discharge of the DC
voltage.
Wait until the LEDs are OFF before returning fasten terminals back to the compressor
terminals.
Minimum requirements to refer to the result on the inverter checker module:
 All 3 phases and neutral are available, and
 Inverter PCB control is active. Check if the green LED “HAP” on the inverter PCBs are
blinking normal (approx. 1/ second). If LEDs are OFF, need to exit the “standby
mode” of the inverter:
 Disconnect and reconnect power supply control PCB, or
 Forced thermostat ON condition, or
 Make shortly set 2-6-1 (forced thermostat ON indoor), or
 2-20-1 (manual refrigerant charge).
 Once the LED is blinking on the inverter PCB, change related setting immediately
back to set 0 to deactivate related function.
 Diode module generates the required 500 VDC.
Cautions:

 In case there is more than 1 compressor in a system (outdoor is 14 HP or larger, or

multi outdoor configuration) all compressor inverter PCBs will perform the power
transistor check. In such case, disconnect U/V/W fasten terminals on all
compressors. Avoid accidental touch of fasten terminals to short-circuit or earth leak
to casing.
 To stop the power transistor check mode, change setting to default 2-28-0.
 Output to U/V/W will also stop when outdoor unit main PCB decides standby mode of
inverter circuit.
 Next time graph shows the different steps during the power transistor check mode.
 Switching sequence during power transistor check mode:
Disconnect U/V/W from compressor before

performing the power transistor check.
Step 2:
Voltage Mode 2-28
Step 1: Magnectic output Check 4
Set 02Ѝ01, then
Mode 2-28 switch (K1M) U/V/W Frequency: 10 Hz press “Return” twice
Set 01Ѝ02, then ON OR press “MODE” button
press “Return” twice
±100V
AC*
Check 1 Check 2 Check 3 ±6 sec ±3 sec
Voltage
output
Magnectic U/V/W Check 5
switch Frequency: 240 Hz
K1M OFF ±170
VAC*
±60 VAC*
±3 sec
±30 sec
Check 1 : AC power input (connector X10A on A2P: inverter compressor) 380-415 V
unbalance max. 2%.
Check 2 : relay "K1M" on inverter PCB switches: check DC voltage on P&N increase to
±500 VDC.
Check 3 : DC = 1.42 x VAC power supply L1-L3: check at connector X3A (8-12 HP), or
X5A, X6A (14-20 HP).
Check 4 : AC U/V/W 10 Hz intermediate: check difference within 10 V (at fasten U/V/W)
Check 5 : AC U/V/W 240 Hz continuous output while voltage drop (discharge capacitors
DC) check difference between U/V/W within 10 V. 2 LEDs (V phase) brightness
reduce until OFF.
*Note: Actual voltage value depends on meter characteristics
 m2-29: Capacity priority. When the night-time low noise operation is in use, performance of
system might drop because airflow rate of outdoor unit is reduced.
 Default value: 0. Capacity priority cannot be used.
 Field setting 1: capacity priority can temporary cancel the night-time low noise operation.
Capacity priority can be initiated when certain operation parameters approach the safety
setting:
 Raise in high pressure during cooling.
 Raise of discharge pipe temperature.
 Raise of inverter current.
 Raise of fin temperature inverter PCB.

 When operation parameters return to normal range, the capacity priority is switched OFF,
enable to reduce airflow rate depending on night-time low noise operation is still required
(end time for low night noise operation is not reached or external input night-time low
noise operation is still closed).
If capacity priority is set in

Operation capacity priority setting, the fan
sound speed will be increased Time set with night-time low
Time set with night-time low according to the load of air noise operation end setting
noise operation start setting conditioning when load is heavier.
Rated
∗Night-time
Level 1
Level 2 ∗Low noise

∗Operation sound mode mode instructing
set with night-time low
noise operation setting
Level 3 Low noise mode ∗Operation sound set with
instructing Operation sound external low noise setting
set with external low noise
setting
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM
Set with night-time low noise operation start Set with night-time low noise operation end
setting. (Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) setting. (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)
 m2-30: Power consumption limitation level 1. If the system needs to be running under
power consumption limitation conditions via the external control adaptor for outdoor unit
DTA104A61/62. This setting defines the level power consumption limitation that will be
applied for level 1. The level is according the table.
 Default: 3 (70%)
 Field setting:
set 2-30 current limit set (%)
1 60
2 65
3 70 (default)
4 75
5 80
6 85
7 90
8 95
 m2-31: Power consumption limitation level 2. If the system needs to be running under
power consumption limitation conditions via the external control adaptor for outdoor unit
DTA104A61/62. This setting defines the level power consumption limitation that will be
applied for level 2. The level is according the table.
 Default: 1 (40%)
 Field setting:
set 2-31 current limit set (%)
1 40 (default)
2 50
3 55
 m2-38: Emergency operation “Master”. To disable permanent compressor operation: in

case of single module or “Master” unit of a multi outdoor system, this setting allows:
 Default value: 0. Compressor operation enabled.
 Field setting:
 Set 1: inverter 1 compressor is disabled.
 Set 2: inverter 2 compressor is disabled. Only to make in case of 16-20 HP. Note that
compressor 2 is left side located.
 Set 3: all compressors in this master module are disabled permanent.

 m2-39: Emergency operation “Slave 1”. To disable permanent compressor operation of

“Slave 1” unit of a multi outdoor system:
 Field set:
 Set 1: Inverter 1 compressor is disabled.
 Set 2: Inverter 2 compressor is disabled. Only to make in case of 16-20 HP. Note that
 Set 3: All compressors in this master module are disabled permanent.
 m2-40: Emergency operation “Slave 2”. To disable permanent compressor operation of

“Slave 2” unit of a multi outdoor system:
 Field setting:
 Set 1: Inverter 1 compressor is disabled.
 Set 2: Inverter 2 compressor is disabled. Only to make in case of 16-20 HP. Note that
 Set 3: All compressors in this master module are disabled permanent.
Combination table setting 2-38, 2-39 and 2-40:

Master/
disable Slave 1 Slave 2
individual
compressor 1 2-38-1 2-39-1 2-40-1
compressor 2 2-38-2 2-39-2 2-40-2
module 2-38-3 2-39-3 2-40-3
 m2-51: Master/Slave setting Multi. When 2 or 3 modules are installed as a multi-outdoor
(by common refrigerant piping and wiring by terminals Q1Q2) configuration is automatically
detected. In certain cases, the sequence of the slave units need to be set manually (in case
of AIRNET monitoring).
 Default value: 0. Automatic detection.
 Field setting: ensure that the modules in a multi are set different status. Even some
modules in a multi are set manually to same status, U7 error will appear.
 1: Forced Master (F1F2/Ind terminals should be connected to indoor units).
 2: Forced Slave 1 (only Q1Q2 terminals should be wired to Master module).
 3: Forced Slave 2 (only Q1Q2 terminals should be wired to Master module).
 m2-81: Cooling comfort setting. The comfort level is related to the timing and the effort
(power consumption) which is put in achieving a certain room temperature by changing
temporally the refrigerant temperature to different values in order to achieve requested
conditions more quickly.
 Default value: 1 (Mild). Undershoot during cooling operation is allowed compared to the
requested refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature
very fast. The undershoot is not allowed from the startup moment. The startup occurs
under the condition which is defined by the operation mode. In case of cooling operation
the evaporating temperature is allowed to go down to 6°C on temporary base depending
on the situation. When the request from the indoor units becomes more moderate, the
system will eventually go to the steady state condition which is defined by the operation
method above. The startup condition is different from the powerful and quick comfort
setting.
 Field setting:
 0: Eco. The original refrigerant temperature target, which is defined by the Te setting
(field setting 2-8) in cooling mode, is kept without any correction, unless for protection
control.

 2: Quick. Undershoot during cooling operation is allowed compared to the requested

refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature very fast.
The overshoot is allowed from the start up moment. In case of cooling operation the
evaporating temperature is allowed to go down to 6°C on temporary base depending
on the situation. When the request from the indoor units becomes more moderate, the
system will eventually go to the steady state condition which is defined by the
operation method above.
 3: Powerful. Undershoot during cooling operation is allowed compared to the
requested refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature
very fast. The overshoot is allowed from the start up moment. In case of cooling
operation the evaporating temperature is allowed to go down to 3°C on temporary
base depending on the situation. This setting is used in conjunction with setting 2-8.
 The graph below shows the different patterns of target Te according to setting 2-81
“cooling comfort setting”
Refrigerant temperature
Target Powerful mode
Te
Quick mode
Mild mode
Te 6°C
Te 3°C
time
 m2-90: Indoor unit without power U4 error generation. In case an indoor unit needs
maintenance or repair on the electric side, it is possible to keep the rest of the VRV DX
indoor units operating without power supply to some indoor unit(s).
 Field setting 1: Possible to operate system when some indoor units are temporary
without power supply. The following conditions must be fulfilled:
 Maximum equivalent piping length of the farthest indoor less than 120 m.
 Index indoor units power simultaneously less than 30% of the nominal outdoor.
 Total capacity is less than 30% of the nominal one of the outdoor unit.
 Operation time is limited to 24 hours period.
 It is recommended to shut down connected indoor units at the same floor.
 Not possible to use service mode operation (e.g. recovery mode).
 Backup operation has priority over this special feature.
 Not possible to use when the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is defective.
 Not possible to use with systems that include BP units.
 It is necessary to wait for 10 min. before shutting down the connected indoor units
after indoor units operation is stopped.

2.7 Eco Mode Setting

By connecting an external contact input in the input of mode configuration and external control
adaptor (sold separately), you may control Eco mode setting, limiting compressor operation
load and power consumption.
When Eco mode is set as unavailable (Outdoor unit external control adaptor is
unnecessary)
Eco mode control is unavailable during cooling operation.
When the Eco level of Eco mode control is set as Standard/Low or Eco mode control is
set as unavailable by external control adaptor
Setting description Setting mode
Item Condition Description External control adaptor Outdoor unit PCB
Eco level Standard Eco level set as Short-circuit the low Set mode 2-11 to
Standard by low noise noise level terminal in Eco setting by low noise
level the terminal TeS1 level input
Eco level set as Short-circuit the demand Set mode 2-11 to
Standard by demand input terminal 3 – C in Eco setting by demand
control the terminal TeS1 input
Low Eco level set as Low Short-circuit the demand
by demand control input terminal 2 – C in
the terminal TeS1
Eco control unavailable Eco control set as Open the low noise Set mode 2-11 to
unavailable by low level terminal in the Eco setting by low noise
noise level terminal TeS1 level input
Eco control set as Open the demand Set mode 2-11 to
unavailable by input terminal in the Eco setting by demand
demand control terminal TeS1 input
1. Connect the external control adaptor and short-circuit the input terminal TeS1 if necessary.
2. Set mode 2-11 (External Eco Setting) to Eco setting by low noise level input or Eco
setting by demand input according to the short-circuited terminal.
About Eco Level Setting

The upper limit of Te (target evaporation temperature) is changed based on the Eco level.
In case of VRTsmart control

VRTsmart control Mode 2-76: Te upper limit
Standard 22°C
Eco level
Low 9°C
The lowest temperature between the above and mode 2-76 VRTsmart control Te upper limit is
set.
In case of VRT control

Mode 2-78: Te upper limit
VRT control
Standard High
Standard 17°C 21°C
Eco level
Low 16°C 20°C
The priority of each setting is as follows:

1. Mode 2-23 (Eco Control Unavailable Setting)
2. Mode 2-11 (External Eco Setting) and external control adaptor input
3. Eco mode setting

2.8 Setting of Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand

Operation
Setting of Night-time Low Noise Operation
By connecting the external contact input to the low noise input of the outdoor unit external
control adaptor (optional), you can lower operating noise by 2-3 dB.
Setting Content
Level 1 Set the outdoor fan to Step 7 or lower.
A. When night-time low noise operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of
the external control adaptor for outdoor unit)
1. Connect external control adaptor for outdoor unit and short circuit terminal of night-time low
noise operation (Refer below figure). If carrying out demand or low noise input, connect the
adaptor’s terminals as shown below. External control adaptor for outdoor unit Host computer
Outside wiring indicated monitor panel by dotted line or demand controller
F1 X
F2 X
P3 X
P4 X
External control Demand Low

adaptor for 1 2 3 C noise
outdoor unit X X X X X X
Host computer Outside wiring indicated

monitor panel by dotted line
or demand
controller
2. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-12 (External low noise or demand setting) to ON.
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select an external low noise level for the item 2-25.
4. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, set the item 2-29 (Capacity priority setting) to ON. (If
the condition is set to ON, when the air conditioning load reaches a high level, the low noise
operation command will be ignored to put the system into normal operation mode.)
B. When night-time low noise operation is carried out automatically (External control
adaptor for outdoor unit is not required)
1. While in setting mode 2, select a night-time low noise operation level for the item 2-22.
2. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select a starting time of night-time low noise operation
(i.e., 8:00 PM, 10:00 PM, or 12:00 AM) for the item 2-26. (Use the starting time as a guide since
it is estimated according to outdoor temperatures.)
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select an ending time of night-time low noise operation
(i.e., 06:00 AM, 07:00 AM, or 08:00 AM) for the item 2-27. (Use the ending time as a guide since
it is estimated according to outdoor air temperatures.)
4. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, set the item 2-29 (Capacity priority setting) to ON. (If the
condition is set to ON, when the air conditioning load reaches a high level, the system will be put
into normal operation mode even during night-time.)

Image of operation in the case of A
Operation If capacity priority is set in

sound Capacity priority setting, the fan
speed will be increased according
to the load of air conditioning
when load is heavier.
Rated Operation sound
during low noise
Low noise mode instructing mode can be set with
Level 1 Approx. 55 db (target) External low noise
level setting (Factory
(The power consumption may
setting is level 2.)
be increased by about 10%.)
Level 2 Approx. 50 db (target)
Level 3 Approx. 45 db (target)
Operation sound level set with External low noise setting
Note1: Above values are reference only (measured in silent room)

Note2: Above values are for 1 module only.
Image of operation in the case of B

Operation Capacity priority setting, the fan
sound speed will be increased
Time set with night-time low noise according to the load of air Time set with night-time low
operation start setting conditioning when load is heavier. noise operation end setting
Rated
Operation sound during
night-time low noise
Night-time operation mode can be set
Level 1 with night-time low noise
operation level setting.
(Factory setting is OFF.)
Level 2
Level 3
Operation sound level set with
night-time low noise operation
setting
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM

Set with night-time low noise operation start setting. Set with night-time low noise operation end setting.
(Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B

Operation Capacity priority setting, the fan
sound speed will be increased Time set with night-time low noise
Time set with night-time low noise according to the load of air operation end setting
operation start setting conditioning when load is heavier. Operation sound during
Rated low noise mode can be
set with External quiet
operation level setting.
∗Night-time (Factory setting is level 2.)
Level 1
Operation sound during
night-time low noise operation
∗Low noise mode can be set with
Level 2 ∗Operation sound level set mode instructing night-time low noise operation
with night-time low noise level setting. (Factory setting is
operation setting When external low noise
Level 3 instruction is received during
Low noise mode ∗Operation sound set with
instructing External low noise setting the operation with night-time
Operation sound set with low noise operation mode.
External low noise setting Level 2 precedes level 1 and
level 3 precedes level 2.
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM
Set with night-time low noise operation start setting. Set with night-time low noise operation end setting.
(Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)

Setting of Demand Operation

By connecting the external contact input to the demand input of the external control adaptor for
outdoor unit (optional), the power consumption of unit operation can be saved suppressing the
compressor operating condition.
Setting content Setting method
External control adaptor
Set item Condition Content for outdoor Outdoor unit PCB
unit
Level 1 The compressor operates at Set the item 2-32 to Demand 1, and the item
60% or less of rating. 2-30 to Level 1.
75% or less of rating. Short circuit "1" and 2-30 to Level 4.
Demand 1 "C" on the terminal strip
Level 5 The compressor operates at (TeS1). Set the item 2-32 to Demand 1, and the item
Demand 2 50% or less of rating. Short circuit "2" and "C". 2-31 to Level 2.
Demand 3 — Forced thermostat OFF Short circuit "3" and "C". —
: However the demand operation does not occur in the following operation modes.
(1) Startup control
(2) Oil return operation
(3) Pump down residual operation
If carrying out demand or low noise input, connect the adaptor’s terminals as shown below.
F1 X
F2 X
P3 X
P4 X
External control Demand Low

adaptor for 1 2 3 C noise
outdoor unit X X X X X X
Host computer Outside wiring indicated

monitor panel by dotted line
or demand
controller
A. When the demand operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of the
external control adaptor for outdoor unit).
1. Connect external control adaptor for outdoor unit and short circuit terminals as required
(Refer to the figure above).
2. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-12 (External low noise or demand setting) to ON.
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select a demand 1 level for the item 2-30.
B. When the constant demand operation is carried out. (Use of the external control
adaptor for outdoor unit is not required.)
1. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-32 (Constant demand setting) to Level 1.
While in setting mode 2, select a demand 1 level for the item 2-30.

Image of operation in the case of A
Power consumption
Rated
Demand level 1 Demand level 2 Demand level 3 The power
instructing instructing instructing consumption
80% during the
demand level 1
70% instructing can be
60% set with the
Power consumption set by "Demand 1 level
"Demand 1 level setting". setting".
40% ("70% of rated
power
consumption" has
been set at
Forced thermostat OFF factory.)
(Fan operation)
Image of operation in the case of B
Power consumption When the

"Normal demand
setting" is set to
ON ("OFF" has
been set at
Rated factory.), the
power
consumption can
80% be set with the
70% "Demand 1 level
setting". ("70% of
60% The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting". rated power
consumption" has
been set at
factory.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B

Power consumption The power
consumption can
be set with the
"Demand 1 level
setting". ("70% of
rated power
Rated consumption" has
been set at
80% factory.)
70%
60% The power consumption set with
#Demand level #Demand level
"Demand 1 level setting". 2 instructing 3 instructing
40%
#During constant demand
operation, when the
Forced thermostat OFF external demand
(Fan operation) instruction is received, the
instruction with higher
demand level has the
precedence.

SiAF341904E Test Operation
3. Test Operation
3.1 Checks before Test Operation
Before carrying out a test operation, proceed as follows:
Step Action
Make sure the voltage at the primary side of the safety breaker is:
1
415 V ± 10% for 3-phase units
2 Fully open the liquid and the gas stop valve.
3.2 Checkpoints
To carry out a test operation, check the following:
 Check that the temperature setting of the remote controller is at the lowest level in cooling
mode or use test mode.
 Go through the following checklist:
Checkpoints Cautions or warnings
Are all units securely installed? Dangerous for turning over during storm
Possible damage to pipe connections
Is the earth wire installed according to the applicable Dangerous if electric leakage occurs
local standard?
Are all air inlets and outlets of the indoor and outdoor Poor cooling
units unobstructed?
Does the drain flow out smoothly? Water leakage
Is piping adequately heat-insulated? Water leakage
Have the connections been checked for gas Poor cooling
leakage? Stop
Is the supply voltage conform to the specifications on Incorrect operation
the name plate?
Are the cable sizes as specified and according to Damage of cables
local regulations?
Are the remote controller signals received by the No operation
unit?

Test Operation SiAF341904E
3.3 Test Operation Procedure

The procedure below describes the test operation of the complete system. This operation
checks and judges following items:
 Check of wrong wiring (communication check with indoor units).
 Check of the stop valves opening.
 Judgment of piping length.
On top of this system test operation, indoor units operation should also be checked separately.
 Make sure to carry out the system test operation after the first installation. Otherwise, the
error code U3 will be displayed on the user interface and normal operation or individual
indoor unit test run cannot be carried out.
 Abnormalities on indoor units cannot be checked for each unit separately. After the test
operation is finished, check the indoor units one by one by performing a normal operation
using the user interface. Refer to the indoor unit installation manual for more details
concerning the individual test run.
INFORMATION
 It may take 10 minutes to achieve a uniform refrigerant state before the compressor starts.
 During the test operation, the refrigerant running sound or the magnetic sound of a solenoid
valve may become loud and the display indication may change. These are not malfunctions.
Procedure
1. Close all front panels in order to not let it be the cause of misjudgment (except the electrical
component box inspection opening service cover).
2. Make sure all field settings you want are set.
3. Turn ON the power to the outdoor unit and the connected indoor units.
NOTICE
Be sure to turn on the power 6 hours before operation in order to protect the compressor.
4. Make sure the default (idle) situation is existing. Push BS2 for 5 seconds or more. The unit
will start test operation.
 The test operation is automatically carried out, the outdoor unit display will indicate "t01"
and the indication "Test operation" and "Under centralized control" will display on the
user interface of indoor units.
Steps during the automatic system test run procedure:
"t01": control before start up (pressure equalization)
"t02": cooling start up control
"t03": cooling stable condition
"t04": communication check
"t05": stop valve check
"t06": pipe length check
"t09": pump down operation
"t10": unit stop
 During the test operation, it is not possible to stop the unit operation from a user
interface. To abort the operation, press BS3. The unit will stop after ±30 seconds.
5. Check the test operation results on the outdoor unit segment display.
Normal completion: no indication on the segment display (idle)
Abnormal completion: indication of error code on the segment display
Take actions for correcting the abnormality. When the test operation is fully completed, normal
operation will be possible after 5 minutes.

SiAF341904E Test Operation
3.4 Turn Power ON

Turn outdoor unit and indoor • Be sure to turn the power ON 6 hours before starting operation to protect
unit power ON. compressors.
Check the 7 segment display of • Check to be sure the transmission is normal.

the outdoor unit PCB. In a normal condition, the 7-segment display is OFF. Please refer to the
following figure for other states.
OFF
Light up
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3

Blinking
Power switched ON
initial check
Normal Abnormal
Initialization in
progress
Main error code Switching

alternative
1 second
Initialization
terminated
(normal)
Sub error code
(∗) The master unit is the outdoor unit to which the transmission wiring for
the indoor units is connected.
The other outdoor units are slave units.
• Make field settings if needed.

Make field settings with outdoor
(For the setting procedure, refer to information in "Field Settings for
unit PCB.
Outdoor Unit".)
For the outdoor-multi system, make field settings with the master unit.
(Field settings made with the slave unit will be all invalid.)
The check operations shown below will be automatically initiated.

Conduct check operations.
• Check for erroneous wirings
• Check for failure to open stop valves
• Check for excessive refrigerant refilling
• Automatic judgment of piping length
• Before starting the normal operation after the completion of check

Check for normal operation. operations, make sure indoor and outdoor units normally operate.

SiAF341904E
Part 6
Service Diagnosis
1. Servicing Items to be Confirmed .........................................................160

1.1 Troubleshooting....................................................................................160
1.2 Precautions for Maintenance................................................................160
2. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................162
2.1 With Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor.....................................164
2.2 For All Outdoor Units............................................................................165
3. Refrigerant Properties (R-410A) .........................................................166
4. Troubleshooting with Remote Controller.............................................167
4.1 Wired Remote Controller......................................................................167
4.2 BRC4C, BRC7E Series ........................................................................168
4.3 BRC4M151W16 ...................................................................................170
4.4 Error Codes and Descriptions ..............................................................171
4.5 Error Codes (Sub Codes).....................................................................173
5. Troubleshooting by Error Code ...........................................................183
5.1 External Protection Device Abnormality ...............................................183
5.3 Drain Level Control System Abnormality..............................................185
5.4 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload.........................................................187
5.5 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality..............................................................189
5.6 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality ......................................................194
5.7 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust Clogging ..............197
5.8 Humidifier System Abnormality ............................................................198
5.9 Auto Grille Unit Error ............................................................................199
5.10 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality ........................................200
5.11 Transmission Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and
Fan PCB)..............................................................................................201
5.12 Transmission Error ...............................................................................203
5.13 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and
Auto Grille Control PCB) ......................................................................204
5.15 Combination Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)...207
5.16 Capacity Setting Abnormality ...............................................................208
5.18 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error ..................................................210
5.19 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality ..........................................215
5.20 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality....................................................216
5.21 Current Leakage Detection ..................................................................217
5.22 Missing of Leakage Detection Core .....................................................218
5.23 Activation of High Pressure Switch ......................................................219
5.24 Activation of Low Pressure Sensor ......................................................221
5.25 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock..........................................................223
5.26 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality ...........................................................225
158 Part 6 Service Diagnosis

SiAF341904E
5.27 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality.......................................228

5.28 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................229
5.29 Wet Alarm.............................................................................................231
5.30 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................233
5.31 Harness Abnormality (between Outdoor Unit Main PCB and
Inverter PCB)........................................................................................234
5.32 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality.............................................................235
5.34 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................238
5.35 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................239
5.36 Inverter PCB Abnormality.....................................................................240
5.37 Momentary Power Failure during Test Operation ................................242
5.38 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................243
5.39 Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent ..............................................245
5.40 Compressor Overcurrent......................................................................247
5.41 Compressor Startup Abnormality .........................................................249
5.42 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and
Outdoor Unit Main PCB........................................................................252
5.43 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance ........................................................254
5.44 Reactor Temperature Abnormality .......................................................256
5.45 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality .................................257
5.46 Field Setting after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality
or Combination of PCB Abnormality.....................................................259
5.47 Refrigerant Shortage Warning..............................................................260
5.48 Open Phase .........................................................................................262
5.49 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality .....................263
5.50 Check Operation Not Executed............................................................265
5.51 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units..............266
5.52 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit.........269
5.53 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units .........................................270
5.54 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote Controllers .........275
5.55 Other Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit Abnormality................................276
Indoor Unit and Remote Controller.......................................................277
5.57 Address Duplication of Centralized Controller......................................280
5.58 Transmission Error between Centralized Controller and Indoor Unit ...281
5.59 System Not Set Yet ..............................................................................284
5.60 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address Undefined .............285
6. Check ..................................................................................................287
6.1 High Pressure Check ...........................................................................287
6.2 Low Pressure Check ............................................................................288
6.3 Superheat Operation Check.................................................................289
6.4 Power Transistor Check .......................................................................290
6.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check.............................................................292
6.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check.................................................................293
6.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure ..............................................294
6.8 Thermistor Check .................................................................................295
6.9 Pressure Sensor Check .......................................................................298
6.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires ................................................299
6.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable) ............................301
6.12 Fan Motor Connector Check (Signal Cable) ........................................302
6.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check ...............................................303
Part 6 Service Diagnosis 159

Servicing Items to be Confirmed SiAF341904E
1. Servicing Items to be Confirmed

1.1 Troubleshooting
(1) Initial verification and troubleshooting
1. Properly understand the end user's needs and issues.
2. Check the cause of errors according to the description provided by the end user.
3. Check if the remote controller displays any error codes.
(Or use the outdoor unit monitor mode to check for errors).
↓
4. If there is no display of error codes, refer to Symptom-based Troubleshooting on page
162 for diagnosis.
If an error code is displayed, refer to troubleshooting flowchart for diagnosis.
(2) Take appropriate measures.

1. Repair the defect or replace the parts according to the troubleshooting results.
2. Turn off the power supply for 10 minutes before disassembling.
3. The refrigerant has to be collected before refrigerant system components are replaced.
(3) Verification after taking appropriate measures

1. Run the unit after repairing the defect to confirm normal unit operation.
2. Record the check results and inform the client.
1.2 Precautions for Maintenance

Pay attention to the following matters in servicing.
(1) Precaution for maintenance

Touch the paint-free metal part of the product (electrical box lid of the standard model; tap bolts
of electrical box of anti-corrosion and heavy anti-corrosion models) to release static electricity
before starting work.
(2) Precautions for maintaining the service cover

After maintenance, make sure to close the service cover.
(Otherwise, leakage of water or contamination by foreign matter may cause defects)
(3) Precautions for maintaining the electrical box

1. Turn off the power for 10 minutes before opening the cover of the electrical box.
2. After opening the cover, use the multimeter to measure the terminal voltage of the power
supply terminal to make sure that the power has been cut.
Then check if the circuit capacitor voltage is under 50 VDC.
3. To avoid PCB defects, touch the earth terminal of the electrical box with your hand when
unplugging the connector to release static electricity.
4. Unplug the connectors X1A/X2A of the outdoor fan motor.
When unplugging the connectors, do not touch the live parts.
(When the outdoor fan is rotating because of strong wind, there is a risk of electric shock due
to main PCB capacitor power storage.)
5. After maintenance, reconnect the connectors of the outdoor fan in their original positions.
 Otherwise, the remote controller will display error code E7, preventing normal operation.

SiAF341904E Servicing Items to be Confirmed
(4) Precautions for outdoor unit multi system

All the settings should be made in the master unit. Settings in the slave units are deemed
unavailable.
Differentiation of Master/Slave Units

1. The outdoor unit master unit is the unit which has the connecting wires to the indoor unit. All
the other units are slave units.
2. You may also differentiate the master/slave units by the 7-segment display.
7-segment display
In normal mode, press the BS1 button once, and in SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
the confirmation mode, check if the 7-segment
display shows the code on the right. 1. 0 0
Press the confirmation button (BS3) Master 0
to check for the master/slave units
Slave 1 1
Slave 2 2
(5) Precautions for piping work and refrigerant charging:

This unit uses R-410A refrigerant. Pay attention to the following conditions.
1. The charging pipe and the manifold tube use R-410A products for pressure maintenance
and avoiding contamination by impurities (SUNISO oil, etc.).
2. Be sure to purge with nitrogen when brazing.
 Properly perform airtightness test and vacuum drying. (Airtight test pressure: 4.0 MPa)
 Charge refrigerant in liquid state.
(6) Precautions for operating in servicing mode (field setting):
When a test operation is interrupted or after exiting service mode, please wait for at least one
minute before entering service mode again. In case of continuous execution, the outdoor unit
PCB may sometimes display an error code. If any error codes are displayed, press the
RETURN button (BS3). If performing the above operation still does not eliminate the error,
reconnect the unit to the power supply.

Symptom-based Troubleshooting SiAF341904E
2. Symptom-based Troubleshooting
Symptom Supposed Cause Countermeasure
1 The system does not start operation at all. Blowout of fuse(s) Turn Off the power supply and then
replace the fuse(s).
Cutout of breaker(s) • If the knob of any breaker is in its
OFF position, turn ON the power
supply.
• If the knob of any circuit breaker is
in its tripped position, do not turn
ON the power supply.
ON
Knob
Tripped
OFF
Circuit breaker
Power failure After the power failure is reset,

restart the system.
The connector loose or not fully Turn off the power supply to verify
plugged in the connection of the connector.
2 The system starts operation but makes an Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
immediate stop. or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
3 The system does not cool or heat air well. Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
Enclosed outdoor unit(s) Remove the enclosure.
Improper set temperature Set the temperature to a proper
degree.
Airflow rate set to LOW Set it to a proper airflow rate.
Improper direction of air diffusion Set it to a proper direction.
Open window(s) or door(s) Shut it tightly.
IN COOLING Hang curtains or shades on
Direct sunlight received windows.
IN COOLING The model must be selected to
Too many people staying in a room match the air conditioning load.
IN COOLING
Too many heat sources (e.g. OA
equipment) located in a room
4 The system does The system stops and If the operation lamp on the remote Normal operation. The system will
not operate. immediately restarts controller turns ON, the system will automatically start operation after a
operation. be normal. These symptoms lapse of five minutes.
indicate that the system is
Pressing the temperature controlled so as not to put
setting button immediately unreasonable loads on the system.
resets the system.
The remote controller displays The system is controlled with Operate the system using the
UNDER CENTRALIZED centralized controller. Blinking COOL/HEAT centralized remote
CONTROL, which blinks for a display indicates that the system controller.
period of several seconds cannot be operated using the
when the OPERATION button remote controller.
is depressed.
The system stops immediately The system is in preparation mode Wait for a period of approximately
after turning ON the power of microcomputer operation. one minute.
supply.
5 The system The remote controller displays The system stops due to an Remove causes of electrical noises.
makes error codes U4 or U5, and the interruption in communication If these causes are removed, the
intermittent system stops but restarts after between units caused by electrical system will automatically restart
stops. a lapse of several minutes. noises coming from equipment operation.
other than air conditioners.
6 The system This symptom occurs The system is in preparation mode Wait for a period of approximately
conducts fan immediately after turning ON of operation. 10 minutes.
operation but not the power supply.
cooling
operation. The remote controller displays In thermal storage operation, the Normal operation.
UNDER CENTRALIZED unit is set to fan operation in cooling
CONTROL; no cooling operation, and the remote controller
operation is performed. Switch shows CENTRALIZED CONTROL.
to fan operation.

SiAF341904E Symptom-based Troubleshooting
Symptom Supposed Cause Countermeasure

7 The airflow The airflow direction is not Automatic control Normal operation.
direction is not corresponding to that
reproduced displayed on the remote
according to the controller.
setting. The flap does not swing.
8 A white mist Indoor unit Uneven temperature distribution Clean the inside of the indoor unit.
comes out from In cooling operation, the due to heavy stain of the inside of
the system. ambient humidity is high. the indoor unit
(This indoor unit is installed in
a place with much oil or dust.)
Indoor unit Hot gas (refrigerant) flown in the Normal operation.
Immediately after cooling indoor unit results to be vapor from
operation stopping, the the unit.
ambient temperature and
humidity are low.
9 The system Indoor unit These are operating sounds of the Normal operation.
produces Immediately after turning ON electronic expansion valve of the This sound becomes low after a
sounds. the power supply, indoor unit indoor unit. lapse of approximately one minute.
produces ringing sounds.
Indoor and outdoor units These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Hissing sounds are gas (refrigerant) flowing
continuously produced while respectively through the indoor and
in cooling operation. outdoor units.
Indoor and outdoor units These sounds are produced when Normal operation.
Hissing sounds are produced the gas (refrigerant) stops or
immediately after the startup changes flowing.
or stop of the system.
Indoor unit These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Faint sounds are continuously the drain discharge device in
produced while in cooling operation.
operation or after stopping the
operation.
Indoor unit These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Creaking sounds are resin parts expanding and
produced after stopping the contracting with temperature
operation. changes.
Indoor unit On VRV systems, these sounds are Normal operation.

Sounds like trickling or the like produced when other indoor units in
are produced from indoor operation. The reason is that the
units in the stopped state. system runs in order to prevent oil
or refrigerant from dwelling.
Outdoor unit The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
Pitch of operating sounds changes the operating frequency.
changes.
10 Dust comes out Dust comes out from the Dust, which has deposited on the Normal operation.
from the system. system when it restarts after inside of indoor unit, is blown out
the stop for an extended from the system.
period of time.
11 Odors come out In operation Odors of room, cigarettes or else The inside of the indoor unit should
from the system. adsorbed to the inside of indoor unit be cleaned.
are blown out.
12 Outdoor unit fan In operation The reason is that fan revolutions Normal operation.
does not rotate. are controlled to put the operation to
the optimum state.
13 LCD display 88 Immediately after turning ON The reason is that the system is Normal operation.
appears on the the power supply checking to be sure the remote This code is displayed for a period
remote controller. controller is normal. of approximately one minute at
maximum.
14 The outdoor unit After stopping operation It stops in order to prevent oil or Normal operation.
compressor or refrigerant from dwelling. It stops after a lapse of
the outdoor unit approximately 5 to 10 minutes.
fan does not
stop.
15 The outdoor gets While stopping operation The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
hot. is warmed up to provide smooth
startup of the system.
16 The system does The system is in dry The reason is that the dry operation Change the system to cooling
not cool air well. operation. serves not to reduce the room operation.
temperature where possible.

Symptom-based Troubleshooting SiAF341904E
2.1 With Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor

Problem Measure
1 Louver operation different from setting Refer to the flowchart below.
Individual airflow direction setting different from the actual · Check the "Louver operation different from setting" error
2
airflow direction diagnosis.
3 When in stop mode, the louver does not close completely. Turn off the circuit breaker and then turn it on again.
The remote controller menu does not display energy saving Please check Infrared presence floor sensor error
operating mode for when people are not present. (CE) in troubleshooting.
The remote controller menu does not display the stop function
4
for when people are not present.
The remote controller menu does not display the automatic
draft prevention function.
The menu does not display the eco-friendly display function. No defect.
5
Set the clock.
During cooling and dry operation, the louver automatically No defect.
6 switches from horizontal (P0) to one-level downward (P1). When relative ambient humidity is higher, automatic louver
control will be activated.
Although people are not present, the infrared presence sensor Check if there are any objects that generate temperature
detects human presence. change when moving.
For example:
· An electric heater with swing function
7
· Doors, curtains, blind switches
· Output of paper from a fax machine or a printer
· Turning on/off of incandescent lights
· Moving objects
Although people are present, the infrared presence sensor fails Check for the following conditions.
to determine their presence. · Lack of movement
8 · Facing away from the sensor
· Little skin exposed
· Slight movement in a place far from the sensor
Large difference between floor temperature and actual Check for the following conditions.
temperature · Sensor detection zone affected by solar radiation
· High or low temperature objects in the sensor detection
zone
9
· Large difference between floor temperature and
temperature of the living space
· Sensors installed near walls may be affected by wall
temperature.
Error diagnosis of "Louver operation different from setting"
Is the individual YES

Normal
airflow set? Reset (Cancel)
individual airflow.
NO
Is the Is the
YES automatic draft prevention YES
airflow direction set to Normal
automatic? function "enabled"? Automatic draft
NO NO prevention function
switches flap to
horizontal position
when human
presence is detected.
Is the connection YES Is the YES

of the step motor wire harness Replace the wire
connector normal? broken? harness.
NO
Replace the step
NO motor. (Motor failure)
Connect to the
connector
correctly before
action verification.

SiAF341904E Symptom-based Troubleshooting
2.2 For All Outdoor Units

Problem Measure
Decrease of main circuit power supply insulation Define the measure using the flowchart below.
resistance (Less than 1 M)
Decrease of main circuit power supply

insulation resistance
Cut the power supply.
Remove the compressor wiring from the

power supply terminal. Isolate the wiring
and be careful not to touch the live parts.
Measure the insulation resistance of the

main circuit power supply.
NO
1 MΩ or more? Defective local power supply
YES Check the local power supply.

Turn the power supply on and leave it on
for 6 hours (keep the compressor wiring
disconnected).
Cut the power supply.
Connect the compressor wiring to the

terminal, or to the noise filter PCB and
measure the insulation resistance.
NO
1 MΩ or more? Compressor abnormality
YES Replace the compressor.

Normal

Refrigerant Properties (R-410A) SiAF341904E
3. Refrigerant Properties (R-410A)

4.00 3.90
3.80 3.70
3.60 3.50
3.40 3.30
3.20 3.10
3.00 2.90
2.80 2.70
2.60 2.50
Pressure gauge value (MPa G)

Absolute pressure (MPa)
2.40 2.30
2.20 2.10
2.00 1.90
1.80 1.70
1.60 1.50
1.40 1.30
1.20 1.10
1.00 0.90
0.80 0.70
0.60 0.50
0.40 0.30
0.20 0.10
0.00 –0.10
–50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Temperature ˚C
Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute

Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature
(°C) Pressure (°C) Pressure (°C) Pressure (°C) Pressure
(MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa)
–50 0.11 –20 0.40 10 1.09 40 2.42
–48 0.12 –18 0.43 12 1.15 42 2.54
–46 0.13 –16 0.46 14 1.22 44 2.67
–44 0.15 –14 0.50 16 1.29 46 2.80
–42 0.16 –12 0.54 18 1.37 48 2.93
–40 0.18 –10 0.57 20 1.45 50 3.07
–38 0.19 –8 0.61 22 1.53 52 3.21
–36 0.21 –6 0.66 24 1.61 54 3.36
–34 0.23 –4 0.70 26 1.70 56 3.51
–32 0.25 –2 0.75 28 1.79 58 3.64
–30 0.27 0 0.80 30 1.89 60 3.83
–28 0.29 2 0.85 32 1.99 62 4.00
–26 0.32 4 0.91 34 2.09 64 4.17
–24 0.34 6 0.96 36 2.20 ― ―
–22 0.37 8 1.02 38 2.31 ― ―

SiAF341904E Troubleshooting with Remote Controller
4. Troubleshooting with Remote Controller

4.1 Wired Remote Controller
4.1.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63
The illustrations are for BRC1E63 as representative.
The following message is displayed on the screen when an error (or a warning) occurs during
operation.
Check the error code and take the corrective action specified for the particular model.
Screen
Operation lamp
Menu/Enter button
(1) Check if it is error or warning.

Operation Status Display
Abnormal The system stops The operation lamp (green)
shutdown operating. starts to blink. The message
Error: Push Menu button
blinks at the bottom of the
screen.
Warning The system The operation lamp (green)

continues its remains on. The message
operation. Warning: Push Menu button
blinks at the bottom of the
screen.
(2) Take corrective action.

Press the Menu/Enter button to check the
error code. Error code
FXFSQ25ARV1
Take the corrective action specific to the RXQ6ARY1 Applicable
model names
model.

Troubleshooting with Remote Controller SiAF341904E

If the unit stops due to an error, the operation indicating LED on the signal receiving part of
indoor unit blinks.
The error code can be determined by following the procedure described below. (The error code
is displayed when an operation error has occurred. In normal condition, the error code of the
last problem is displayed.)
UP button
DOWN button
Unit number
MODE button
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button to enter inspection mode. Then the figure 0 blinks on the
unit number display.
2. Press UP button or DOWN button and change the unit number until the receiver of the
remote controller starts to beep.
3 short beeps : Follow all steps below.
1 short beep : Follow steps 3 and 4. Continue the operation in step 4 until you hear a
continuous beep.
This continuous beep indicates that the error code is confirmed.
Continuous beep : There is no abnormality.
3. Press MODE button. The left 0 (upper digit) indication of the error code blinks.
4. Press UP button or DOWN button to change the error code upper digit until the receiver of
the indoor unit starts to beep.
 The upper digit of the code changes as shown below.
O0 A C E H F J L P U 9 8 7 6 5 4
"UP" button "DOWN" button
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits match. (Error code is confirmed.)
2 short beeps : The upper digit matches but the lower digit does not.
1 short beep : The upper digit does not match.
5. Press MODE button. The right 0 (lower digit) indication of the error code blinks.
6. Press UP button or DOWN button and change the error code lower digit until the receiver of
the indoor unit generates a continuous beep.
 The lower digit of the code changes as shown below.
0123456789AHCJEF
"UP" button "DOWN" button
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits match. (Error code is confirmed.)
2 short beeps : The upper digit matches but the lower digit does not.
1 short beep : The upper digit does not match.

7. Press MODE button to return to the normal mode. If you do not press any button for 1
minute, the remote controller automatically returns to the normal mode.
2. Change the unit number with

Normal mode UP button or DOWN button.
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button to enter

inspection mode.
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
returns to normal mode.
3. Press MODE
button.
The upper digit
7. When MODE button is blinks.
pressed or no button is
pressed for 1 minute,
equipment returns to
normal mode.
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
returns to normal mode.
6. Change the lower

digit with UP
button or DOWN 4. Change the
button. upper digit with
UP button or
5. Press MODE button. DOWN button.
The lower digit blinks.

4.3 BRC4M151W16
When the air conditioner stops in emergency, the operating indicator lamp on the indoor unit
starts blinking.
Take the following steps yourself to read the error code that appears on the display. Contact
your local dealer with this code. It will help pinpoint the cause of the trouble, speeding up the
repair.
35
7
24
6
1
1. Press the INSPECTION button to select the inspection mode “ ”.
“0” appears on display and blinks.
“UNIT No.” appears.
2. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the unit number.
Press to change the unit number until the indoor unit beeps and perform the following
operation according to the number of beeps.
Number of beeps
3 short beeps.............Perform all steps from 3 to 6.
1 short beep .............Perform 3 and 6 steps.
1 long beep .............Normal state
3. Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button.
“0” on the left-hand of the error code blinks.
4. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the error code.
Press until the indoor unit beeps twice.
5. Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button.
“0” on the right-hand of the error code blinks.
6. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the error code.
Press until the indoor unit makes a long beep.
The error code is fixed when the indoor unit makes a long beep.
7. Reset of the display
Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button to get the display back to the normal
state.

4.4 Error Codes and Descriptions

k: ON h: OFF l: Blink
Operation Reference
Error code Error contents
lamp page
Indoor Unit A0 l External protection device abnormality 183
A1 l Indoor unit PCB abnormality 184
A3 l Drain level control system abnormality 185
Indoor fan motor lock, overload 187
A6 l
Indoor fan motor abnormality 189
A8 l Power supply voltage abnormality 194
A9 l Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality, dust clogging 197
AF k Humidifier system abnormality 198
AH l Auto grille unit error 199
AJ l Capacity determination device abnormality 200
Transmission abnormality (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 201
C1 l Transmission error 203
Transmission error (between indoor unit PCB and auto grille control PCB) 204
C4 l Indoor heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor abnormality 206
C5 l Indoor heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor abnormality 206
Combination abnormality (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 207
C6 l Capacity setting abnormality 208
Indoor unit PCB abnormality 209
C9 l Suction air thermistor (R1T) abnormality 206
CE k Infrared presence/floor sensor error 210
CJ k Remote controller thermistor abnormality 215
Outdoor Unit E1 l Outdoor unit main PCB abnormality 216
Current leakage detection 217
E2 l
Missing of leakage detection core 218
E3 l Activation of high pressure switch 219
E4 l Activation of low pressure sensor 221
E5 l Inverter compressor motor lock 223
E7 l Outdoor fan motor abnormality 225
E9 l Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality 228
F3 l Discharge pipe temperature abnormality 229
F4 l Wet alarm 231
F6 l Refrigerant overcharged 233
H3 l Harness abnormality (between outdoor unit main PCB and inverter PCB) 234
H7 l Outdoor fan PCB abnormality 235
H9 l Outdoor air thermistor (R1T) abnormality 236
Discharge pipe thermistor (R21T, R22T) abnormality 236
J3 l
Compressor body thermistor (R8T, R9T) abnormality 236
J5 l Suction pipe thermistor (R3T) abnormality 236
J7 l Subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R5T) abnormality 236
J8 l Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R4T) abnormality 236
J9 l Subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R6T) abnormality 236
JA l High pressure sensor abnormality 238
JC l Low pressure sensor abnormality 239
L1 l Inverter PCB abnormality 240
L2 l Momentary power failure during test operation 242
L4 l Inverter radiation fin temperature rise abnormality 243
L5 l Compressor instantaneous overcurrent 245
L8 l Compressor overcurrent 247
L9 l Compressor startup abnormality 249
LC l Transmission error between inverter PCB and outdoor unit main PCB 252
P1 l Power supply voltage imbalance 254
P3 l Reactor temperature abnormality 256
P4 l Inverter radiation fin temperature abnormality 257
Field setting after replacing outdoor unit main PCB abnormality or
PJ l 259
combination of PCB abnormality

Operation Reference
Error code Error contents
lamp page
System U0 k Refrigerant shortage warning 260
U1 l Open phase 262
U2 l Power supply insufficient or instantaneous abnormality 263
U3 l Check operation not executed 265
U4 l Transmission error between indoor units and outdoor units 266
U5 l Transmission error between remote controller and indoor unit 269
U7 l Transmission error between outdoor units 270
U8 l Transmission error between main and sub remote controllers 275
U9 l Other indoor units and outdoor unit abnormality 276
Improper combination of indoor unit and outdoor unit, indoor unit and remote
UA l 277
controller
UC k Address duplication of centralized controller 280
UE l Transmission error between centralized controller and indoor unit 281
UF l System not set yet 284
UH l System abnormality, refrigerant system address undefined 285
The system operates for error codes indicated, however, be sure to check and repair.

4.5 Error Codes (Sub Codes)

If an error code like the one shown below is displayed when the navigation remote controller
(BRC1E series) is in use, make a detailed diagnosis or a diagnosis of the relevant unit referring
to the attached list of detailed error codes.
4.5.1 Indoor Unit

Troubleshooting
Error code
Description of error Description of diagnosis
Fan motor locked A locked fan motor current has been detected.
A6 - 01 Turn the fan by hand to check for the connection of
connectors.
Fan overcurrent error A fan motor overcurrent has been detected.
Check for the connection of the connector between the
A6 - 10 fan motor and the PCB for the fan. If the connection is
normal, replace the fan motor. If this still cannot solve the
error, replace the PCB for the fan.
Fan position detection error An error in the detection of position of the fan motor.
Check for the connection of the connector between the
A6 - 11 fan motor and the PCB for the fan. If the connection is
normal, replace the fan motor. If this still cannot solve the
error, replace the PCB for the fan.
A8 - 01 Power supply voltage error Check for the input voltage of the fan motor.
Electronic expansion valve error There is an error in the electronic expansion valve coil or
A9 - 01 a connector disconnected.
Refrigerant leakage detection error Refrigerant leaks even if the electronic expansion valve is
A9 - 02
closed. Replace the electronic expansion valve.
Transmission error (between the self-cleaning decoration Check for the connection of the harness connector
AH - 03 panel and the indoor unit) between the panel PCB and the indoor unit PCB.
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is mounted)
Dust detection sensor error Check for the connections of the connector X12A on the
AH - 04 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is mounted) panel PCB and the connectors X18A and X19A on the
sensor PCB.
Dust collection sign error Check for clogging with dust at the dust collection port as
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is mounted) well as in the brush unit, S-shaped pipe, and dust box.
AH - 05
Furthermore, check for any stains of the light receiving
and emitting parts of the infrared unit.
Air filter rotation error Check for anything getting in the way of rotating the filter
AH - 06 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is mounted) (e.g. the filter comes off or the drive gear is clogged with
foreign matter).
Damper rotation error The damper does not rotate normally. Check for any
AH - 07 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is mounted) foreign matter around the damper and for the operation of
the gear and limit switch.
Filter self-cleaning operation error The unit has not yet completed the filter self-cleaning
AH - 08 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is mounted) operation even after the lapse of specified period of time.
Check for any external noise, etc.
Filter self-cleaning operation start disabled error (when The unit has been put into a state in which the filter self-
AH - 09 the self-cleaning decoration panel is mounted) cleaning operation is disabled. Check the unit for the
operating conditions.
Auto grille unit error It is detected that the grille does not operate properly.
AH - 12 (when the auto grille unit is mounted) Check whether the grille does not contact with something
or the wire does not snaggle.
Capacity setting error There is an error in the capacity setting of the indoor unit
AJ - 01
PCB.
Electronic expansion valve setting error There is a fault in the setting of the gear type electronic
AJ - 02 expansion valve/direct acting type electronic expansion
valve.
C1 - 01 Transmission error (between indoor unit PCB and the Check for the conditions of transmission between the
PCB for the fan) indoor unit PCB and the PCB for the fan.
Transmission error (between indoor unit PCB Refer to C1-06 flowchart.
C1 - 06
and auto grille control PCB)
Defective combination of indoor unit PCB and the PCB for A combination of indoor unit PCB and the PCB for the fan
C6 - 01 the fan is defective. Check whether the capacity setting adaptor
is correct and the type of the PCB for the fan is correct.
C6 - 05 Indoor unit PCB abnormality Refer to C6-05 flowchart.
Infrared presence sensor error The output of the infrared presence sensor is not
detected.
CE - 01 Check if the connector is properly connected, and if the
harness is not broken.

Troubleshooting
Error code
Description of error Description of diagnosis
Infrared floor sensor error A disconnection of the temperature correction circuit
(thermistor) of the infrared floor sensor has been
CE - 02
detected.
Check if the connector is properly connected.
Infrared floor sensor error A short-circuit of the temperature correction circuit
(thermistor) of the infrared floor sensor has been
detected.
CE - 03
Check if the pins of the connector are touching each
other, and if any foreign matter on the PCB is causing a
short-circuit.
Infrared floor sensor error An abnormality other than the ones mentioned above has
been detected.
CE - 04 Check if the temperature nearby the sensor is too high,
and if there is any foreign matter that may cause noise.
U4 - 01 Indoor-Outdoor transmission error Refer to the U4 flowchart.
Refrigerant type error The type of refrigerant used for the indoor unit is different
UA - 13
from that used for the outdoor unit.
Not applicable for self-cleaning decoration panel (when An outdoor unit is not applicable for the self-cleaning
UA - 15 the self-cleaning decoration panel is mounted) decoration panel is connected.
As there are various combinations of indoor and outdoor units, the sub codes of A0 - A3 are not
shown in this table.

4.5.2 Outdoor Unit, System

Troubleshooting
Error code
Description of error Diagnosis
E1 - 01 Outdoor unit PCB error Refer to the E1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E1 - 02 Defective outdoor unit PCB on the Error code shown to the left.
E2 - 01 Earth leakage detection error (Master)
E2 - 02 Earth leakage detection error (Slave 1)
E2 - 03 Earth leakage detection error (Slave 2) Refer to the E2 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E2 - 06 Missing of earth leakage detection core (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
E2 - 07 Missing of earth leakage detection core (Slave 1)
E2 - 08 Missing of earth leakage detection core (Slave 2)
E3 - 01 High pressure switch activated (Master)
E3 - 03 High pressure switch activated (Slave 1)
Refer to the E3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E3 - 07 High pressure switch activated (Batch)
on the Error code shown to the left.
E3 - 13 Liquid stop valve check error (Master)
E3 - 14 Liquid stop valve check error (Slave 1)
E3 - 15 Liquid stop valve check error (Slave 2)
E4 - 01 Low pressure error (Master)
Refer to the E4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E4 - 02 Low pressure error (Slave 1)
E4 - 03 Low pressure error (Slave 2)
E5 - 01 Compressor M1C lock (Master)
E5 - 02 Compressor M1C lock (Slave 1)
E5 - 03 Compressor M1C lock (Slave 2) Refer to the E5 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E5 - 07 Compressor M2C lock (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
E7 - 01 Fan motor M1F lock (Master)
E7 - 02 Fan motor M2F lock (Master)
E7 - 05 Fan motor M1F instantaneous overcurrent (Master)
E7 - 06 Fan motor M2F instantaneous overcurrent (Master)
E7 - 09 Fan motor M1F IPM error (Master)
E7 - 10 Fan motor M2F IPM error (Master)
E7 - 13 Fan motor M1F lock (Slave 1)
E7 - 17 Fan motor M1F instantaneous overcurrent (Slave 1) Refer to the E7 flowchart and make a diagnosis
of the relevant fan motor based
E7 - 18 Fan motor M2F instantaneous overcurrent (Slave 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
E7 - 21 Fan motor M1F IPM error (Slave 1)
E7 - 29 Fan motor M1F instantaneous overcurrent (Slave 2)
E7 - 30 Fan motor M2F instantaneous overcurrent (Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
E9 - 03 Electronic expansion valve coil Y2E error (Master)
E9 - 06 Electronic expansion valve coil Y2E error (Slave 1)
E9 - 26 Electronic expansion valve coil Y4E error (Master)
E9 - 48 Electronic expansion valve overcurrent (Master)
E9 - 49 Electronic expansion valve overcurrent (Slave 1)
Refer to the E9 flowchart and make a diagnosis
E9 - 50 Electronic expansion valve overcurrent (Slave 2) of the relevant electronic expansion valve based
Electronic expansion valve fuse thermal cutting
E9 - 51 (Master)
E9 - 52
(Slave 1)
E9 - 53
(Slave 2)
E9 - 54 Defective circuit (Master)
E9 - 55 Defective circuit (Slave 1)
E9 - 56 Defective circuit (Slave 2)
F3 - 01 Discharge pipe high temperature error (Master)
F3 - 03 Discharge pipe high temperature error (Slave 1)
F3 - 05 Discharge pipe high temperature error (Slave 2) Refer to the F3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
F3 - 20 Compressor overheat error (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
F3 - 21 Compressor overheat error (Slave 1)
F3 - 22 Compressor overheat error (Slave 2)
F4 - 02 Wet alarm for compressor M1C (Master)
F4 - 03 Wet alarm for compressor M2C (Master)
F4 - 04 Wet alarm for compressor M1C (Slave 1)
Refer to the F4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
F4 - 08 Wet error for compressor M1C (Master)
F4 - 09 Wet error for compressor M2C (Master)
F4 - 10 Wet error for compressor M1C (Slave 1)
F4 - 14 Indoor unit failure alarm
F6 - 02 Excess refrigerant charge error Excess refrigerant charge was detected during test run.
Excess refrigerant charge warning Excess refrigerant charge was detected
F6 - 03
during operation other than test run.
H3 - 02 Connection error between main PCB and inverter PCB

1 (Master)
Connection error between main PCB and inverter PCB
H3 - 03
2 (Master)
H3 - 04
1 (Slave 1) Refer to the H3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Connection error between main PCB and inverter PCB on the Error code shown to the left.
H3 - 05
2 (Slave 1)
H3 - 06
1 (Slave 2)
H3 - 07
2 (Slave 2)
H7 - 21 Defective fan PCB for M1F (A7P) (Master)
H7 - 22 Defective fan PCB for M2F (A4P) (Master)
H7 - 23 Defective fan PCB for M1F (A7P) (Slave 1) Refer to the H7 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
H7 - 24 Defective fan PCB for M2F (A4P) (Slave 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
H7 - 25 Defective fan PCB for M1F (A7P) (Slave 2)
H7 - 26 Defective fan PCB for M2F (A4P) (Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
H9 - 01 Defective outdoor air thermistor (Master)
Refer to the H9 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
H9 - 02 Defective outdoor air thermistor (Slave 1)
H9 - 03 Defective outdoor air thermistor (Slave 2)
J3 - 16 Defective discharge pipe 1 thermistor: Open (Master)
J3 - 17 Defective discharge pipe 1 thermistor: Short (Master)
J3 - 18 Defective discharge pipe 2 thermistor: Open (Master)
J3 - 19 Defective discharge pipe 2 thermistor: Short (Master)
J3 - 22 Defective discharge pipe 1 thermistor: Open (Slave 1)
J3 - 23 Defective discharge pipe 1 thermistor: Short (Slave 1)
Defective compressor body thermistor for
J3 - 38 M1C: Open (Master)
J3 - 39
M1C: Short (Master)
J3 - 42
M1C: Open (Slave 1) Refer to the J3 flowchart and make a diagnosis
Defective compressor body thermistor for of the relevant compressor based
J3 - 43 M1C: Short (Slave 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
J3 - 44
M1C: Open (Slave 2)
J3 - 45
M1C: Short (Slave 2)
J3 - 47 M2C: Open (Master)
J3 - 48
M2C: Short (Master)
J3 - 49 Defective compressor body thermistor for

M2C: Open (Slave 1)
J3 - 50
J3 - 51
M2C: Open (Slave 2)
J3 - 52 Defective compressor body thermistor for

J3 - 56 Discharge pipe warning (Master)
J3 - 57 Discharge pipe warning (Slave 1)
J3 - 58 Discharge pipe warning (Slave 2)
J5 - 01 Defective suction pipe thermistor (Master)
Refer to the J5 flowchart and make a diagnosis
J5 - 03 Defective suction pipe thermistor (Slave 1) of the relevant thermistor based
J5 - 05 Defective suction pipe thermistor (Slave 2)
Defective subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe
J7 - 06
thermistor (Master)
Refer to the J7 flowchart and make a diagnosis
Defective subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe
J7 - 07 of the relevant thermistor based
thermistor (Slave 1)
J7 - 08 Defective subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe
thermistor (Slave 2)
Defective heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
J8 - 01
(Master)
Defective heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor Refer to the J8 flowchart and make a diagnosis
J8 - 02 of the relevant thermistor based
(Slave 1)
Defective heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
J8 - 03 (Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
J9 - 01 Defective subcooling heat exchanger outlet thermistor
(Master)
Defective subcooling heat exchanger outlet thermistor
J9 - 02
(Slave 1)
Defective subcooling heat exchanger outlet thermistor
J9 - 03 Refer to the J9 flowchart and make a diagnosis
(Slave 2)
of the relevant thermistor based
J9 - 08 Error detection of subcooling heat exchanger outlet on the Error code shown to the left.
pipe thermistor (Master)
Error detection of subcooling heat exchanger outlet
J9 - 09
pipe thermistor (Slave 1)
Error detection of subcooling heat exchanger outlet
J9 - 10
pipe thermistor (Slave 2)
JA - 06 Defective high pressure sensor: Open (Master)
JA - 07 Defective high pressure sensor: Short (Master)
JA - 08 Defective high pressure sensor: Open (Slave 1) Refer to the JA flowchart and make a diagnosis
of the relevant sensor based
JA - 09 Defective high pressure sensor: Short (Slave 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
JA - 10 Defective high pressure sensor: Open (Slave 2)
JA - 11 Defective high pressure sensor: Short (Slave 2)
JC - 06 Defective low pressure sensor: Open (Master)
JC - 07 Defective low pressure sensor: Short (Master)
JC - 08 Defective low pressure sensor: Open (Slave 1) Refer to the JC flowchart and make a diagnosis
of the relevant sensor based
JC - 09 Defective low pressure sensor: Short (Slave 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
JC - 10 Defective low pressure sensor: Open (Slave 2)
JC - 11 Defective low pressure sensor: Short (Slave 2)
L1 - 01 IPM error: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 02 Defective current sensor: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 03 Current offset: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 04 IGBT error: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 05 Jumper settings error: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 07 IPM error: Compressor M1C (Slave 1)
L1 - 08 Defective current sensor: Compressor M1C (Slave 1)
L1 - 09 Current offset: Compressor M1C (Slave 1)
L1 - 10 IGBT error: Compressor M1C (Slave 1)
L1 - 15 Jumper settings error: Compressor M1C (Slave 1)
L1 - 16 Jumper settings error: Compressor M1C (Slave 2) The inverter PCB may be defective or a PCB other than
the specified is mounted.
L1 - 17 IPM error: Compressor M2C (Master)
Refer to the L1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L1 - 18 Defective current sensor: Compressor M2C (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
L1 - 19 Current offset: Compressor M2C (Master)
L1 - 20 IGBT error: Compressor M2C (Master)
L1 - 21 Jumper settings error: Compressor M2C (Master)
L1 - 36 EEPROM abnormality: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 37 EEPROM abnormality: Compressor M2C (Master)
L1 - 38 EEPROM abnormality: Compressor M1C (Slave 1)

Troubleshooting
Error code
Power supply voltage abnormality: Compressor M1C
L1 - 47
(Master) The inverter PCB may be defective or a PCB other than
Power supply voltage abnormality: Compressor M2C the specified is mounted.
L1 - 48 Refer to the L1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
(Master)
L1 - 49 (Slave 1)
L1 - 50
(Slave 1)
L1 - 51
(Slave 2)
L1 - 52 (Slave 2)
L2 - 01 Momentary power failure (Master)
L2 - 02 Momentary power failure (Slave 1)
L2 - 03 Momentary power failure (Slave 2) Refer to the L2 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L2 - 04 Power ON (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
L2 - 05 Power ON (Slave 1)
L2 - 06 Power ON (Slave 2)
Radiation fin temperature rise: Inverter PCB for M1C
L4 - 01
(Master)
L4 - 02
(Slave 1)
L4 - 03 (Slave 2)
L4 - 06 Radiation fin temperature rise: Fan M1F (Master)
L4 - 07 Radiation fin temperature rise: Fan M2F (Master)
L4 - 09 Radiation fin temperature rise: Inverter PCB for M2C Refer to the L4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
(Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
L4 - 10
(Slave 1)
L4 - 11
(Slave 2)
L4 - 18 Radiation fin temperature rise: Fan M1F (Slave 1)
L5 - 03 Current offset error (Master)
L5 - 05 Current offset error (Slave 1)
L5 - 07 Current offset error (Slave 2) Refer to the L5 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L5 - 14 Compressor M2C instantaneous overcurrent (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
L5 - 15 Compressor M2C instantaneous overcurrent (Slave 1)
L5 - 16 Compressor M2C instantaneous overcurrent (Slave 2)
L8 - 03 Compressor M1C overcurrent error (Master)
L8 - 06 Compressor M1C overcurrent error (Slave 1)
L8 - 07 Compressor M1C overcurrent error (Slave 2) Refer to the L8 flowchart and make a diagnosis
of the relevant compressor based
L8 - 11 Compressor M2C overcurrent error (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.

Troubleshooting
Error code
L9 - 01 Compressor M1C startup error (Master)
L9 - 05 Compressor M1C startup error (Slave 1)
L9 - 10 Compressor M2C startup error (Master)
L9 - 12 Compressor M2C startup error (Slave 2) Refer to the L9 flowchart and make a diagnosis
of the relevant compressor based
L9 - 13 Compressor M1C output open phase (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
L9 - 14 Compressor M1C output open phase (Slave 1)
L9 - 16 Compressor M2C output open phase (Master)
Transmission error
LC - 14 (Between outdoor units, inverter PCB 1) (Master)
Transmission error
LC - 15
(Between outdoor units, inverter PCB 1) (Slave 1)
Transmission error
LC - 16
Transmission error
LC - 19 (Between outdoor units, fan PCB 1) (Master)
Transmission error
LC - 20
(Between outdoor units, fan PCB 1) (Slave 1)
Transmission error
LC - 21
(Between outdoor units, fan PCB 1) (Slave 2) Refer to the LC flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Transmission error on the Error code shown to the left.
LC - 24 (Between outdoor units, fan PCB 2) (Master)
Transmission error
LC - 25
Transmission error
LC - 26
Transmission error
LC - 30
(Between outdoor units, inverter PCB 2) (Master)
Transmission error
LC - 31
LC - 32 Transmission error
P1 - 01 Unbalanced power supply voltage (Master)
P1 - 02 Unbalanced power supply voltage (Slave 1)
P1 - 03 Unbalanced power supply voltage (Slave 2) Refer to the P1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
P1 - 07 Inverter 2 power supply unbalanced voltage (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
P1 - 08 Inverter 2 power supply unbalanced voltage (Slave 1)
P1 - 09 Inverter 2 power supply unbalanced voltage (Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
P3 - 01 Defective reactor thermistor 1
(Master: Inverter PCB 1)
Defective reactor thermistor 1
P3 - 02
(Slave 1: Inverter PCB 1)
P3 - 03
P3 - 04 Defective reactor thermistor 2

(Master: Inverter PCB 1)
P3 - 05
P3 - 06
(Slave 2: Inverter PCB 1) Refer to the P3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Defective reactor thermistor 1 on the Error code shown to the left.
P3 - 07 (Master: Inverter PCB 2)
P3 - 08
P3 - 09
P3 - 11
P3 - 12
Defective radiation fin thermistor
P4 - 02 Defective fan M1F fin sensor (Master)
P4 - 03 Defective fan M2F fin sensor (Master)
P4 - 04
P4 - 05 (Slave 2: Inverter PCB 1)
Defective radiation fin thermistor Refer to the P4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
P4 - 06
(Master: Inverter PCB 2) on the Error code shown to the left.
P4 - 07 Defective radiation fin thermistor
P4 - 08
P4 - 15 Defective fan M1F fin sensor (Slave 1)
PJ - 04 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 1 (Master)
PJ - 05 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 1 (Slave 1)
PJ - 09 Incorrect type of fan PCB 1 (Master)
PJ - 10 Incorrect type of fan PCB 2 (Master)
PJ - 12 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 2 (Master) Refer to the PJ flowchart and make a diagnosis based
PJ - 13 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 2 (Slave 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
PJ - 15 Incorrect type of fan PCB 1 (Slave 1)
U0 - 05 Refrigerant shortage warning (cooling)
U0 - 08 Refrigerant shortage (Master) Refer to the U0 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U0 - 09 Refrigerant shortage (Slave 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
U0 - 10 Refrigerant shortage (Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
U1 - 16 Open phase for power supply (Master)
U1 - 17 Open phase for power supply (Slave 1)
U1 - 18 Open phase for power supply (Slave 2) Refer to the U1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U1 - 19 Hz error for power supply (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
U1 - 20 Hz error for power supply (Slave 1)
U1 - 21 Hz error for power supply (Slave 2)
U2 - 01 Shortage of inverter power supply voltage (Master)
U2 - 08 Shortage of inverter power supply voltage (Slave 1)
U2 - 11 Shortage of inverter power supply voltage (Slave 2) Refer to the U2 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U2 - 22 Shortage of inverter 2 power supply voltage (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
U2 - 25 Shortage of inverter 2 power supply voltage (Slave 1)
U2 - 28 Shortage of inverter 2 power supply voltage (Slave 2)
Initial installation alarm / Test operation failed due to
U3 - 02 indoor unit error
U3 - 03 Test operation not conducted
U3 - 04 Abnormal end of test operation
Premature end of test operation during initial
U3 - 05
transmission error – check indoor unit error U4 / U9
Premature end of test operation during normal Refer to the U3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U3 - 06 transmission error on the Error code shown to the left.
Premature end of test operation due to transmission
U3 - 07
error
Premature end of test operation due to transmission
U3 - 08
error of all units
System refrigerant auto charge operation not yet
U3 - 10 executed
Transmission error between indoor unit and outdoor
U4 - 01
unit Refer to the U4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Transmission error between indoor unit and system: on the Error code shown to the left.
U4 - 03
check indoor unit error
Error when external control adaptor for outdoor unit is
U7 - 01
installed
Alarm when external control adaptor for outdoor unit is
U7 - 02
installed
U7 - 03 Transmission error between master and slave 1 units
U7 - 04 Transmission error between master and slave 2 units Refer to the U7 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U7 - 05 Multi system error on the Error code shown to the left.
U7 - 06 Error in address settings of slave 1 and 2
Connection of four or more outdoor units in the same
U7 - 07
system
U7 - 11 Error in indoor unit connection capacity for test

operation
Other indoor units and outdoor unit abnormality Refer to the U9 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U9 - 01
TSS plus unit field settings error, CT
UA - 00
address duplication warning
UA - 03 Connection of excessive indoor units
UA - 17 Connection of excess indoor units
Refer to the UA flowchart and make a diagnosis based
UA - 18 Connection of incorrect models of indoor units on the Error code shown to the left.
UA - 20 Improper combination of outdoor units
UA - 21 Wrong connection
UA - 31 Multi system combination error
UF - 01 Wrong wiring check error Refer to the UF flowchart and make a diagnosis based
UF - 05 Defective stop valve for test operation on the Error code shown to the left.
UH - 01 Wiring error Refer to the UH flowchart.

SiAF341904E Troubleshooting by Error Code
5. Troubleshooting by Error Code

5.1 External Protection Device Abnormality
Applicable All indoor unit models
Models
Error Code A0
Method of Error Detects open or short circuit between external input terminals in indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision An open circuit occurs between external input terminals with the remote controller set for
Conditions external ON/OFF input.
Supposed  Activation of external protection device

Causes  Improper field setting
 Defective indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting

Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
External
protection device is
connected to terminals T1 and YES Activation of external
T2 of the indoor unit protection device.
terminal block.
NO
Check the setting state of the

ON/OFF input from outside by remote
controller.
External
ON/OFF input (mode
No. 12, first code No. 1) has
YES Change the second code
been set to external protection
device input (second code No. to 01 or 02.
No. 03) by remote
controller.
NO
Replace the indoor unit

control PCB (A1P).

Troubleshooting by Error Code SiAF341904E
5.2 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Models
Error Code A1
Method of Error Data from EEPROM is checked.
Detection
Error Decision Data cannot be correctly received from the EEPROM

Conditions EEPROM: Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
supply is turned OFF.
Supposed  Defective indoor unit control PCB

Causes  External factor (Noise etc.)
Troubleshooting
Turn the power supply OFF,

then the power ON again.
Does the YES

system return to The indoor unit control
normal? PCB (A1P) is normal.
External factor other than
NO error (for example, noise
etc.).
control PCB (A1P).

5.3 Drain Level Control System Abnormality

Applicable FXFSQ-AR, FXMQ-PB
Models
Error Code A3
Method of Error By float switch OFF detection
Detection
Error Decision Float switch goes OFF when the conditions for water level rise are not met
Conditions
Supposed  220-240 V power supply is not provided.

Causes  Defective float switch or short circuit connector
 Defective drain pump
 Drain clogging, upward slope, etc.
 Defective indoor unit control PCB
 Loose connection of connector
Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220-240 V provided? Provide 220-240 V power
supply.
YES
The float
switch is NO A short circuit NO
connected to the indoor connector is Connect either a short circuit
unit PCB. (∗1) connected. (∗1) connector or float switch and
turn ON again.
YES YES
The
float switch Becomes
contact is forming a YES normal when the NO
short circuit (continuity check connector (∗1) of the indoor Replace the indoor unit
with the connector (∗1) unit PCB is short control PCB (A1P).
disconnected) circuited.
NO YES
Defective connection of
connector.
NO The float switch NO
Water builds up
in the drain pan. functions normally. Replace the float switch (S1L).
YES YES
Modify the float switch's
connection and turn ON again.
The
drain pump is NO
connected to the Connect the drain pump and
indoor unit PCB. turn ON again.
(∗2)
YES
A Go to the next page

The drain
pump works when the YES
power supply is reset for the Check the drain piping for
indoor unit. clogging or upward slope, etc.
NO
The
voltage of
drain pump
terminals (∗2) is in NO
accordance to the criteria Replace the indoor unit control
(∗3) (within 5 minutes of PCB (A1P).
resetting the power
supply).
YES
Replace the drain pump or
check for dirt, etc.
Note(s)
1: Float switch (S1L) / 2: Drain pump (M1P) 3: Drain pump (M1P)
Model Note
short circuit connector connector voltage
FXFSQ-AR X15A X25A 13 VDC –
FXMQ-PB X15A X25A 13 VDC –

5.4 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload

Applicable FXMQ40PB, FXAQ-P
Models
Error Code A6
Method of Error Abnormal fan revolutions are detected by a signal output from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision The fan revolutions do not increase.

Conditions
Supposed  Broken wires in, short circuit of, or disconnection of connectors from the fan motor harness
Causes  Defective fan motor
(Broken wires or defective insulation)
 Abnormal signal output from the fan motor (defective circuit)
 Instantaneous disturbance in the power supply voltage
 Fan motor lock
(Due to motor or external causes)
 The fan does not rotate due to foreign matter blocking the fan.
 Disconnection of the connector between the high-power PCB and the low-power PCB:
FXMQ40PB

Troubleshooting

Turn OFF the power

supply, and then wait for
a period of 10 minutes.
Are there
any foreign matter YES
Remove the foreign matter.
around the fan?
NO
Is the
connector properly NO
connected to the indoor Properly connect the connector.
unit main PCB?
(∗1)
YES
By
disconnecting the
connector, the fan can be NO Replace the fan motor (M1F).
lightly rotated by
hand.
YES
CHECK 17
Disconnect the connector
from the fan motor, and then
make measurement of
resistance between pins.
Is the
resistance
between the pins less than NO
Replace the indoor unit main
the judgement PCB (A1P).
criteria?
YES
Replace the fan motor and the
indoor unit main PCB (A1P).
Note(s) 1: Check the following connectors.

Model Connector
FXMQ40PB X8A
FXAQ-P X20A
Reference CHECK 17 Refer to page 302.

5.5 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality

5.5.1 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXFSQ-AR)
Applicable FXFSQ-AR
Models
Error Code A6-10

Method of Error  Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB (A1P)
Detection  Detection from the rotation speed of the fan motor in operation
 Detection from the position signal of the fan motor
 Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB when the fan motor starting operation
Error Decision  An overcurrent flows

Conditions  The rotation speed is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
 A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more.
Supposed  Clogged foreign matter

Causes  Disconnection of fan motor connectors
 Fan motor lock
 Defective fan motor
Troubleshooting
Caution Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Turn OFF the power supply and
wait for 10 minutes.
There is a foreign YES Remove the foreign matter.

matter around the fan.
NO
The fan
motor connector (∗1) is NO
connected to the indoor unit Connect the connector correctly.
main PCB
(A1P).
YES
It is
possible to rotate
the fan manually when the
fan motor connector is NO Replace the fan motor.
disconnected from the indoor
unit main PCB
(A1P).
YES
Resistance
between UVW of fan YES
motor is unbalanced, or Replace the fan motor.
short-circuited.
NO
Turn ON the power supply and check
the HAP lamp on the indoor unit
main PCB (A1P).

The HAP
lamp on the indoor unit NO Replace the indoor unit main
main PCB is
blinking. PCB (A1P).
YES
Replace the fan motor.
1 Check also if the relay connector between the indoor unit main PCB and the fan motor are
correctly connected.

5.5.2 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXMQ50-140PB)

Applicable FXMQ50-140PB
Models
Error Code A6
Method of Error  Error from the current flow on the fan PCB
Detection  Error from the RPM of the fan motor in operation
 Error from the position signal of the fan motor
 Error from the current flow on the fan PCB when the fan motor starting operation
Error Decision  An overcurrent flows.

Conditions  The RPM is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
 A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or
Supposed  Clogging of a foreign matter

Causes  Disconnection of the fan motor connectors (X1A and X2A)
 Disconnection of the connectors between the indoor unit main PCB (A1P) and fan PCB
(A2P)
 Defective fan PCB (A2P)

Troubleshooting
Turn off the power and wait for

10 minutes.
There is a YES
foreign matter around the Remove the foreign matter.
fan.
NO
The fan motor

connectors (X1A and X2A) YES
of the fan PCB (A2P) are Connect the connector
disconnected. properly.
NO
The connectors
between the indoor unit YES
PCB (A1P) and the fan Connect the connector
PCB (A2P) are properly.
disconnected.
NO
The fuse (F3U, white) NO

on the fan PCB (A2P) Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
has no continuity.
YES
The fan can

be moved lightly by
hand after the fan motor NO
connector of the fan PCB
Replace the indoor fan
(A2P) is removed.
motor.
YES
The
resistance between
the power wire terminals of YES
the fan motor and motor frame Replace the indoor fan
(metal part) is 1 MΩ or motor.
below.
NO
CHECK 16
Remove the power wire
connector from the fan motor
and measure the resistance
between U and V, V and W, and
W and U phases.

The resistance YES

among U, V, and W are unbalanced or Replace the indoor fan
short circuited. motor.
NO
CHECK 17
Remove the signal connector
from the fan motor and check
the resistance.
Between VCC and GND YES

terminals, and between GND Replace the indoor fan
and HW, HV, or HU terminals are motor.
short-circuited.
NO
Turn on the power.
The HAP
lamp of the indoor
unit PCB (A1P) blinks and the YES
Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
HAP lamp of the fan PCB
(A2P) is off.
NO
Replace the indoor fan
motor.

5.6 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality

5.6.1 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality (FXFSQ-AR)
Applicable FXFSQ-AR
Models
Error Code A8-01

Method of Error This error is detected by checking the voltage status with the microcomputer.
Detection
Error Decision Overvoltage or voltage drop is detected on the fan driver.

Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection of power supply connector

Causes  Defective indoor unit PCB (A1P)
 External factors (e.g. noise)

Troubleshooting
Check the condition of the power

supply.
Check if power supply voltage is
220-240 V±10%.
There are
problems YES
on the condition of power Correct any fault.
supply described
above.
NO
Is the X27A
connector on the main NO
Properly connect the connector.
PCB properly connected?
YES
Is the
harness connecting YES
the X27A and the terminal block Replace the harness.
(X2M) disconnected?
NO
Is there any external YES

factor such as noise? Remove the external factor.
NO
Turn OFF the power once and turn
ON again.

Start operation by remote
controller.
Does the error NO

A8 reoccur? Normal.
YES
Replace the indoor unit PCB
(A1P).

5.6.2 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality (FXMQ40-140PB)

Models
Error Code A8
Method of Error Error is detected by checking the input voltage of the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When the input voltage of fan motor is 150 V or less, or 386 V or more.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective power supply voltage.

Causes  Defective connection on signal line.
 Defective wiring.
 Instantaneous power failure, others.
Troubleshooting
Check the condition
of the power supply.
(1) Check if power supply
voltage is 220-240 V
± 10%.
(2) Check if there is power
open phase or
defective wiring.
(3) Check if power supply
voltage unbalance is
within 6 V.
There are
problems on the YES
condition of power supply Correct any fault.
described above.
NO
A8 YES
Reoccurrence of Check and correct each wiring.
error.
NO
It is possible to have external

factor, such as brownout and
instantaneous power failure.

5.7 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust

Clogging
Models
Error Code A9, A9-02

Method of Error Electronic expansion valve coil conditions are checked via microcomputer.
Detection The electronic expansion valve main body is checked for dust clogging via microcomputer.
Error Decision Pin input for electronic expansion valve coil is abnormal when initializing microcomputer.
Conditions Either of the following conditions is seen/caused/occurs while the unit stops operation.
 Temperature of suction air (R1T) – temperature of liquid pipe (R2T) > 8°C.
 Temperature of liquid pipe (R2T) shows fixed degrees or below.
Supposed  Defective electronic expansion valve coil

Causes  Defective indoor unit control PCB
 Defective relay cables
Troubleshooting
NO
Power is supplied. Replace the electronic expansion
valve main body.
YES
Electronic expansion NO
valve is connected to Shut the power supply OFF after
indoor unit PCB. connection and then restart.
YES
CHECK 18
Check of electronic NO
expansion valve coil Replace the electronic expansion
indicates normal. valve coil.
YES
Relay cables short YES

circuit or Replace the relay cables.
disconnected.
NO
When restarting the operation

after shutting the power supply
OFF does not work, replace the
indoor unit control PCB (A1P).

5.8 Humidifier System Abnormality

Applicable FXFSQ, FXMQ-PB
Models
Error Code AF
Method of Error Water leakage from the humidifier system is detected based on float switch ON/OFF operation
Detection while the compressor is not in operation.
Error Decision The float switch changes from ON to OFF while the compressor is not in operation.
Conditions  Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed  Humidifier unit (optional accessory) leaking

Causes  Defective drain piping (upward slope, etc.)
Troubleshooting
Field drain
piping has a defect such as YES
Modify the drain piping.
upward sloping.
NO
A humidifier
unit (optional accessory) is YES
installed on the Check if the humidifier unit is
indoor unit. leaking.
NO
Defective indoor unit
control PCB (A1P).

5.9 Auto Grille Unit Error

Applicable FXFSQ (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EASF is installed)
Models
Error Code AH-12

Method of Error This error is determined when an abnormal signal from the auto grille kit is detected.
Detection
Error Decision Any of the following conditions is established while the grille is elevating.
Conditions  The storage detection limit switch does not detect anything for a prescribed time while the
grille is moving upward.
 The position detection limit switch does not detect anything for a prescribed time while the
grille is moving upward.
 The position detection limit switch detects a position for less than one second while the grille
is moving downward.
Supposed  A large load on the grille

Causes  Tangled wire
 Defective motor
 Defective limit switch
Troubleshooting
Is there any YES

abnormality on appearance of Check the items below.
the grille? • The grille is elevating
while tilted in a horizontal
NO direction.
• The grille is caught by
something.
• The grille is not mounted.
After correcting any of
the items above,
perform elevating
operation again.
A large load YES
is applied to the grille. Eliminate the load on the
grille.
Perform elevating
NO operation again.
YES
A wire is tangled. Correct the winding of wire.
NO
YES
Is the drive unit normal? Normal.
NO
Check the limit switch,
gear, motor of the drive
unit.

5.10 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality

Models
Error Code AJ
Method of Error Capacity is determined according to resistance of the capacity setting adaptor and the memory
Detection inside the IC memory on the indoor unit PCB, and whether the value is normal or abnormal is
determined.
Error Decision The capacity code is not saved to the PCB, and the capacity setting adaptor is not connected.
Conditions A capacity that does not exist for that unit is set.
Supposed  The capacity setting adaptor was not installed.

Causes  Defective indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
The NO
indoor unit PCB was replaced Replace the indoor unit control
with a spare PCB. PCB (A1P).
YES
The
capacity setting NO
adaptor was installed when Install a capacity setting
replacing the PCB. adaptor.
YES Replace the indoor unit control

PCB (A1P).

5.11 Transmission Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB

and Fan PCB)
Models
Error Code C1
Method of Error Transmission conditions between the indoor unit control PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P) are
Detection checked via microcomputer.
Error Decision When normal transmission is not carried out for a certain duration.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection of the connector between indoor unit control PCB (A1P) and fan PCB
Causes (A2P)
 Defective indoor unit control PCB (A1P)
 Defective fan PCB (A2P)
 External factor, such as instantaneous power failure

Troubleshooting
Is the
connector between
indoor unit PCB (A1P) and fan NO Connect the connector accurately.
PCB (A2P) accurately
connected? (∗1)
YES
Confirm the condition of
transmission on indoor unit
PCB using field setting mode.
(∗2)
Under above
field setting mode, NO Replace the indoor unit control
second code No. is 01. PCB (A1P).
YES
Connect the connector X70A
and turn ON the power again.
C1
YES Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
Reoccurrence
of error.
NO
Continue the operation (It is

possible to have a cause, such
as instantaneous power failure).
Note(s) 1. Pull out and insert the connector once and check if it is absolutely connected.
2. Method to check transmission part of indoor unit control PCB.
(1) Turn OFF the power and remove the connector X70A of indoor unit control PCB (A1P).
(2) Short circuit X70A.
(3) After turning ON the power, check below numbers under field setting from remote controller.
(Confirmation: Second code No. at the condition of first code No. 21 on mode No. 41)
Determination 01: Normal
Other than 01: Transmission error on indoor unit control PCB
 After confirmation, turn OFF the power, take off the short circuit and connect X70A back to
original condition.

5.12 Transmission Error

Applicable FXFSQ
Models
Error Code C1-01

Method of Error Check the condition of transmission using microcomputer.
Detection
Error Decision Error is decided when transmission has been lost for 15 seconds and the error code is
Conditions displayed on the remote controller 60 seconds later.
Supposed  Defective connection of the transmission connector (X70A)

Causes  Defective indoor unit control PCB
 External factor such as noise
Troubleshooting
Is the
connector X70A on the NO
indoor unit main PCB connected Connect the connector correctly.
correctly?
YES
Is there any YES

external factor such as Remove the external factor.
noise other than failure?
NO
Turn OFF the power supply and
then turn it ON again.
Put the unit into operation with the

remote controller.
Error is displayed NO
again. Normal.
YES
Check the indoor unit control
PCB (A1P).

5.13 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Auto

Grille Control PCB)
Applicable FXFSQ (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EASF is installed)
Models
Error Code C1-06

Method of Error The status of communication between the indoor unit PCB (X70A) and the auto grille control
Detection PCB (X12A) is checked with the microcomputer.
Error Decision When transmission communication between the indoor unit PCB and the auto grille control PCB
Conditions is not normally performed for a certain period or time or more.
Supposed  Defective connection of the transmission communication connector between the indoor unit
Causes PCB and the auto grille control PCB
 Defective auto grille control PCB

Troubleshooting
Is the
X70A connector on the NO
indoor unit PCB properly Properly connect the connector.
connected?
YES
Is the X12A
connector on the auto grille NO
control PCB properly
connected?
YES
Is the harness YES

disconnected? Replace the harness.
NO
Is there any YES

external factor such as Remove the external factor.
noise?
NO
Turn OFF the power once and turn
ON again.
↓
Perform grille operation by wired
remote controller.
Is
"Auto grille
elevation operation" NO
displayed in the remote Check the indoor unit PCB and
controller menu? the auto grille control PCB.
YES
Can
the target unit be NO
Check the indoor unit PCB and
selected?
the auto grille control PCB.
YES
Normal.

5.14 Thermistor Abnormality

Models
Error Code C4, C5, C9

Method of Error The error is determined by the temperature detected by the thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision The thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective thermistor

 Disconnection of connector
Troubleshooting
Remove the thermistor from

the indoor unit PCB. Then,
insert the connector again.
Does the unit YES

operate normally? Normal (The error is caused by
defective contact.)
NO
Remove the thermistor from
the indoor unit PCB, and then
measure the resistance of the
thermistor using a multimeter.
CHECK 11 NO
Normal? Replace the thermistor.
YES
control PCB (A1P).
Note(s) Error code and thermistor

Error Code Thermistor Electric Symbol
C4 Indoor heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor R2T
C5 Indoor heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor R3T
C9 Suction air thermistor R1T

5.15 Combination Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and

Fan PCB)
Models
Error Code C6
Method of Error Transmission conditions with the fan PCB (A2P) are checked using the indoor unit PCB (A1P).
Detection
Error Decision Fan PCB (A2P) communication data is determined to be incorrect.

Conditions
Supposed  Defective fan PCB (A2P)

Causes  Defective connection of capacity setting adaptor
 Field setting error
Troubleshooting
Does the
fan PCB part No. NO
match that of the spare Replace it with the correct
parts list? fan PCB (A2P).
YES
Has the
indoor unit main PCB NO After establishing
(A1P) been replaced with
a spare PCB? transmission for indoor and
outdoor, diagnose the
operation again.
YES
Was the
correct capacity
setting adaptor installed NO
Install the correct capacity
when replacing it with setting adaptor.
a spare PCB?
YES
After establishing
transmission for indoor and
outdoor, diagnose the
operation again.

5.16 Capacity Setting Abnormality

Applicable FXFSQ
Models
Error Code C6-01

Method of Error This error is detected by checking communication between the PCB (A1P) and the fan
Detection microcomputer.
Error Decision Based on the communication data, decide whether the combination of capacity setting and the
Conditions type of fan driver is correct.
Supposed  Defective connection of the capacity setting adaptor

Causes  Wrong field setting
Troubleshooting
Is the indoor
NO
unit PCB (A1P) replaced by After transmission between
the spare PCB? the indoor and the outdoor
PCBs is established, perform
operation again and then
YES
perform diagnosis again.
Is a proper
capacity setting adaptor NO
installed when replaced by the Install a proper capacity
space PCB? setting adaptor.
YES
After transmission between

the indoor and the outdoor
PCBs is established, perform
operation again and then
perform diagnosis again.

5.17 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Applicable FXFSQ
Models
Error Code C6-05

Method of Error This error is detected by checking the current sensor value.
Detection
Error Decision When an abnormal signal is detected at the start of operation of the fan motor.
Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection of the connector of the fan motor lead wire

Causes  Defective fan motor (Broken wires or defective insulation)
 Defective PCB (A1P)
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply, and then

wait for a period of 10 minutes.
Is the fan
motor connector (X901A) NO
connected properly?
YES
Resistances
between UVW phases of
YES
the fan motor are imbalanced, or Replace the fan motor.
there is a short circuit
between UVW.
NO

(A1P).

5.18 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error

Applicable FXFSQ
Models
Error Code CE
Method of Error The contents of a failure vary with the detailed error code. Check the code and proceed with the
Detection flowchart.
Error Decision Error is detected based on sensor output signals

Conditions
Supposed  Defective or disconnected infrared presence sensor connector: CE-01

Causes  Defective infrared floor sensor (Temperature compensation circuit disconnection): CE-02
 Defective infrared floor sensor (Temperature compensation short circuit): CE-03
 Defective infrared floor sensor element: CE-04
Troubleshooting
Error type varies according

to error code. Check the
error code and take the
following steps.
Error code
See diagnosis procedure 1.
CE-01
Error code
CE-02
Error code
CE-03
Error code
CE-04

Troubleshooting
Diagnosis procedure 1
Infrared presence sensor
error (Error code CE-01)
Is the
connection
of the connector
on infrared presence NO
sensor PCB (A3P) and Connect the connector correctly.
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
connection of the NO
Connect the connector correctly.
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared presence sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 22-25.
Displays
15 by the above NO
Normal.
verification method.
YES
Turn off the power and then reconnect.
Displays CE-01
again or 15 for NO
Normal.
sensor and
address data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
Infrared floor sensor error
(Error code CE-02)
Is the
connection
of the connector
on infrared floor NO
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to sensor

and address data No. 26.
Displays
"--" by the above NO
Normal.
YES
Displays CE-02
again or "--" for NO
Normal.
sensor and
address data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
(Error code CE-03)
Is the
connection
of the connector
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 26.
Displays
Normal.
YES
Displays
CE-03 again or "--" NO
for sensor and address Normal.
data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
(Error code CE-04)
Is the
connection
of the connector
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 26.
Displays
Normal.
verification
method.
YES
Displays
CE-04 again or "--" NO
for sensor and address Normal.
data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

5.19 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality

Models
Error Code CJ
Method of Error Error detection is carried out by the temperature detected by the remote controller thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision When the remote controller thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is
Conditions running.
 Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed  Defective remote controller thermistor

Causes  Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Clear the error code history.

(While in inspection mode,
press and hold the ON/OFF
button for a period of 4
seconds or more.)
Is CJ YES
displayed on the remote Replace the remote
controller? controller.
NO
External factor other than
equipment error.
(for example, noise etc.)
Note(s) 1: How to delete “history of error codes”.

Press the ON/OFF button for 4 seconds and more while the error code is displayed in the
inspection mode.

5.20 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality

Applicable All outdoor unit models
Models
Error Code E1
Method of Error Abnormality is detected under the communication conditions in the hardware section between
Detection the indoor unit and outdoor unit.
Error Decision When the communication conditions in the hardware section between the indoor unit and the
Conditions outdoor unit are not normal.
Supposed  Defective outdoor unit main PCB

Causes  Disconnection of the inside/outside relay wires
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power once and

turn ON again.
YES
Return to normal? External factor other than
error (for example, noise
etc.).
NO
Check if
inside / outside
YES
relay wires of outdoor Connect the inside/outside
unit main PCB is relay wires correctly.
disconnected.
NO
Replace the outdoor unit

main PCB (A1P).

5.21 Current Leakage Detection

Models
Error Code E2
Sub code: -01 to -03
Method of Error Current leakage is detected in the earth leakage detection circuit. Error is detected on the
Detection outdoor unit main PCB.
Error Decision When leakage current is detected.

Conditions
Supposed  Earth fault

Causes  Defective wiring with the current sensor
 Temporary liquid back or refrigerant stagnation
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply,

and then disconnect the
compressor lead wire.
Check
if the connection
to the current sensor NO
(T1A) is correctly wired. Correct the wiring.
YES
Defective compressor YES

insulation Replace the compressor.
RXQ6-14A: M1C
RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
NO
Defective
insulation of parts YES
other than the Replace the corresponding
parts.
compressor
NO
Reconnect the wires, and
then reconnect the unit to the Normal
power supply. (Keep operating)
It is possibly caused by
temporary oil return or
refrigerant stagnation.
(Perform maintenance
during long-term
shutdown such as a
power outage.)

5.22 Missing of Leakage Detection Core

Models
Error Code E2
Sub code: -06 to -08
Method of Error Detect error according to whether or not there is continuity across the connector (X101A).
Detection
Error Decision When no current flows at the time of turning ON the power supply.
Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection of connector (X101A)

Causes  Wiring disconnection
 Defective outdoor unit main PCB
Troubleshooting

and then disconnect
compressor leads.
Is the system reset to YES The error is considered to have

normal? resulted from external factors
other than failures (e.g. noise).
NO
Ensure the unit

corresponding to the error
code E2 in monitor mode.
E02-06: Master
E02-07: Slave 1
E02-08: Slave 2
Is X101A connected? NO Properly connect the connector.
YES
Replace the outdoor unit main

PCB (A1P).

5.23 Activation of High Pressure Switch

Models
Error Code E3
Method of Error Detect continuity across the high pressure switch in the protection device circuit.
Detection
Error Decision When part of the protection device circuit opens.

Conditions (Reference) Operating pressure of the high pressure switch:
 Operating pressure: 4.0 MPa
 Resetting pressure: 3.0 MPa
Supposed  Activation of high pressure switch

Causes  Defective high pressure switch
 Momentary power failure
 Defective high pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
Check for the following 3 points:

(1) Is the stop valve open?
(2) Is the high pressure switch connector properly
connected to the outdoor unit main PCB?
(3) Is there continuity across the high pressure
switch?
Are the NO
above 3 points Remedy defective points.
OK?
YES
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the high pressure
service port.
(2) Reset the operation using the remote controller,
and then restart the operation.
Is the
operating
Does the error E3 YES pressure of the NO
high pressure switch Replace the high pressure
recur?
normal switch.
(4.0 MPa)? RXQ6-14A: S1PH
RXQ16-20A: S1PH, S2PH
NO YES
Are the
characteristics of NO
the high pressure sensor Replace the high pressure sensor
normal? (∗1) (S1NPH).
YES

Service Checker CHECK 12

Connect the Service Checker, and then make a comparison between “high
pressure” checked by the Service Checker and the measurement of the high
pressure sensor (*1)
Is
the “high
pressure”
checked by the
NO
Service Checker same as Replace the outdoor unit
the measurement of main PCB (A1P).
the high pressure
gauge?
YES
-The high pressure sensor is normal, and the outdoor unit main PCB is also
normal.
-The high pressure has really become high.
CHECK 1 Eliminate factors that cause the high pressure to rise.
Note(s) 1. Make a comparison between voltage measured by the pressure sensor and that read by the
pressure gauge.
(The pressure sensor makes measurement of voltage at its connector block to convert it to
Pressure. CHECK 12)

5.24 Activation of Low Pressure Sensor

Models
Error Code E4
Method of Error Make judgment of pressure detected by the low pressure sensor with the outdoor unit main
Detection PCB.
Error Decision When low pressure caused a drop while the compressor is in operation:
Conditions  Operating pressure: 0.07 MPa
Supposed  Abnormally drop in low pressure

Causes  Defective low pressure sensor
 The stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
Is the stop NO
Open the stop valve.
valve open?
YES
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the low pressure
service port.
(2) Reset the operation using the remote
controller, and then restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics NO
of the low pressure Replace the low pressure sensor
sensor normal? (S1NPL).
(∗1)
YES
Service Checker CHECK 12
Connect the Service Checker, and then make a comparison between “low
pressure” checked by the Service Checker and the measurement of the low
pressure sensor. (∗1)
Is the
“low pressure”
checked by the
Service Checker same NO
as the measurement of
the low pressure PCB (A1P).
gauge?
YES
- The low pressure sensor is normal, and pressure detection with the
outdoor unit main PCB is also normal.
- The low pressure has really become low.
CHECK 2 Eliminate factors that cause the low pressure to decrease.
Note(s) 1. Make a comparison between voltage measured by the pressure sensor and that read by the
pressure gauge.
(The pressure sensor makes measurement of voltage at its connector block to convert it to
pressure. CHECK 12)


5.25 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock

Models
Error Code E5
Method of Error Inverter PCB takes the position signal from UVW line connected between the inverter and
Detection compressor, and the error is detected when any abnormality is observed in the phase-current
waveform.
Error Decision When the inverter compressor motor does not operate even by starting it in forced startup
Conditions mode.
Supposed  Inverter compressor lock

Causes  High differential pressure (0.5 MPa or more)
 UVW connection error
 Defective inverter PCB
 The stop valve is not opened.
Troubleshooting
Check in Monitor Mode

For the models equipped with 2
compressors, check the
compressor M1C or M2C applicable
to the error code E5 while in
monitor mode of the outdoor unit.
Is the stop NO
valve open? Field factor
YES
Check for the connection wiring.
• For compressor M1C
Is the
connection line NO
of the relevant Replace the connection line,
Power OFF compressor and then securely connect the
normal? connector.
YES
Are wire
connections
made to phases U, V NO Make proper wire connections.
and W in the proper
order and
W
manner?
U
YES
V
Are wire
connections
made according NO Make proper wire connections.
to the wiring
diagram?
YES

The insulation
resistance of the relevant YES Replace the compressor.
compressor is low RXQ6-14A: M1C
(< 100 kΩ) RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
Power OFF NO
The relevant
compressor has a YES
wiring disconnection
in it.
NO
Restart the
compressor, and
then check for the NO
Quit work.
operation. Does the Pressure equalization failure
error recur? may have occurred. Check for
the refrigerant system.
Power ON YES
Has the
compressor
started up at high YES
Pressure equalization failure.
differential pressure
(0.5 MPa or Check for the refrigerant
more)? system.
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Power OFF Is the power Replace the inverter PCB. (#1)
transistor #1
normal? RXQ6-14A: A3P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
YES
The error recurs at NO

Power ON Continue operation.
startup. The error could have
resulted from instantaneous
power failure.
YES
Replace the inverter

Power OFF
PCB. (#1)
The error recurs at NO

Power ON Continue operation.
startup.
YES
Replace the compressor.
This is not a failure of the
inverter PCB. Reinstall the
PCB.
RXQ6-14A: M1C
RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C

5.26 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality

Models
Error Code E7
Method of Error  Detect according to the value of current flowing through the inverter PCB (or fan PCB in
Detection case of fan motor 2).
 Detect error of the fan motor system according to the fan revolutions detected by the Hall IC
during the fan motor runs.
Error Decision  When overcurrent is detected from the inverter PCB or the fan PCB (Detecting overcurrent 4
Conditions times will shut down the system).
 When the fan revolutions fall below a given level for a period of 6 seconds while in fan motor
rotation mode (Detecting shortage of revolutions will shut down the system).
Supposed  Fan motor failure

Causes  Disconnection of harness/connector between the fan motor and the fan PCB
 Fan does not rotate due to foreign matter caught in it
 Clearing condition: fan motor performs normal operation for a period of 5 minutes

Troubleshooting

For the models equipped with 2 fan motors, check the fan
motor M1F or M2F applicable to the error code E7 while in
monitor mode of the outdoor unit.
Turn OFF the power supply, and then wait for a period of 10
There is
foreign matter around the YES
Remove the foreign matter.
applicable fan.
NO
Check for Connection of Connector

Check for the connections of all fan motor connectors.
Some connectors are YES

Insert the connector.
disconnected.
NO
Check for Colors of Relay Connectors

Check for any wire connection errors in 2 units of fan motors.
• Fan motor 1: Power supply cables and signal cables are all white.
• Fan motor 2: Power supply cables and signal cables are red
on the PCB side and white on the motor side.
There is a relay YES

Correct the connection of the
connection error. connector.
NO
There is
no continuity
across the fuse YES
Replace the fan PCB. (#1)
(F101U) on the fan #1
PCB.
RXQ6-12A: A4P
(#1)
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P
NO
The fan
cannot be
rotated by hand when YES
disconnecting the Replace the relevant fan motor.(#2)
connector from the #2
fan motor. RXQ6-12A: M1F
RXQ14-20A: M1F, M2F
NO
Resistance
between the fan
motor power supply YES
cable terminal and the motor Replace the relevant fan motor. (#2)
frame (metallic part) is
not more than 1
MΩ.
NO

CHECK 16
Check for the connector
(power supply cable) of the
fan motor.
Resistance
between U, V, W
phases of the fan motor
power supply cable has lost YES
Replace the relevant fan motor.
balance or short circuit is (#2)
caused between U, V,
W phases.
NO
#3
Turn ON the power supply to check for the following LED lamps.
(1) HAP lamp on the inverter PCB (#3) RXQ6-14A: A3P
(2) HAP lamp on the fan PCB (#1) RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
The HAP
lamp on A3P, A6P YES
blinks, but that on A4P, A7P Replace the fan PCB. (#1)
does not blink.
NO
Replace the fan motor. (#2)

5.27 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality

Models
Error Code E9
Method of Error Detect according to whether or not there is continuity across the electronic expansion valve
Detection coils (Y2E, Y4E).
Error Decision When no current flows through common (COM+) at the time of turning ON the power supply.
Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection of connectors from electronic expansion valves (Y2E, Y4E)

Causes  Defective electronic expansion valve coil
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply

once, and then turn it ON again.
YES Investigate external causes other than

Return to normal?
failures (e.g. noise).
NO
Is sub code one CHECK 18

of the following? YES The resistance of NO
E9-48,49,50,51, the electronic expansion Replace the defective electronic
52,53,54,55,56 valve coil is expansion valve coil.
normal.
NO YES
Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
(A1P).
Check for electronic expansion valves applicable to the error code E9 while
in monitor mode.
• Sub code
Y2E: E9-03 (Master), E9-06 (Slave 1), E9-09 (Slave 2)
Y4E: E9-26 (Master), E9-27 (Slave 1), E9-28 (Slave 2)
Connector for
the electronic expansion NO
valve of the outdoor unit main Properly and securely connect the
PCB (A1P) is connector.
connected.
YES
CHECK 18
The resistance of the NO
electronic expansion Replace the electronic expansion
valve coil is valve coil.
normal.
YES
Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
(A1P).

5.28 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality

Models
Error Code F3
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the discharge pipe or compressor body
Detection thermistor.
Error Decision  When discharge pipe temperature becomes abnormally high (i.e., 135°C or more)
Conditions  When discharge pipe temperature sharply rises (remains at 120°C or more for a period of
consecutive 10 minutes)
 When compressor surface temperature becomes abnormally high (i.e., 120°C or more)
 When compressor surface temperature sharply rises (remains at 110°C or more for a period
of consecutive 10 minutes)
Supposed  Abnormal discharge pipe temperature

Causes  Defective discharge pipe thermistor
 Abnormal compressor surface temperature
 Defective compressor body thermistor

Troubleshooting
Connect the Service Checker.

Reset the system operation,
and then restart it.
CHECK 11
Are the characteristics
of the discharge pipe and NO Replace the relevant thermistor.
compressor body
thermistors normal?
(∗1)
YES
Service Checker
Connect the Service Checker, and then make a
comparison between “discharge pipe temperature” (or
“compressor surface temperature” and “low pressure”
checked by the Service Checker and the
measurements of discharge pipe surface temperature
(or “compressor surface temperature.”)
Is the
“temperature”
checked by the NO
Service Checker same as Replace the outdoor unit main
the measurement of the PCB (A1P).
temperature?
YES
• All thermistors are normal, and temperature detection

with the outdoor unit main PCB is also normal.
• The discharge pipe temperature (or compressor surface
temperature) has really become high.
CHECK 3 Eliminate the causes of superheat operation.
Note(s) 1. Thermistors

RXQ6-14A RXQ16-20A
Applicable Thermistor Electric Electric
symbol Connector symbol Connector
Discharge pipe thermistor

R21T R21T
(for M1C)
Discharge pipe thermistor — R22T
(for M2C) X19A (Group X19A (Group
Compressor body thermistor connector) connector)
R8T R8T
(for M1C)
Compressor body thermistor
— R9T
(for M2C)

5.29 Wet Alarm

Models
Error Code F4
Method of Error In cooling operation, detect the condition under which liquid refrigerant returns to the
Detection compressor, according to the temperature and pressure of each part.
Error Decision When the following wet state continues for a period of 180 minutes, an alert is issued.
Conditions An error is defined for 240 minutes.
 Wet state in outdoor units
When the following wet state continues for a period of 180 minutes, an alert is issued.
 Wet state in some of indoor units
Supposed  Defective suction pipe thermistor

Causes  Defective discharge pipe thermistor
 Defective high pressure sensor
 Defective indoor unit electronic expansion valve
 Dirty air filter

Troubleshooting
Connect the Service Checker.

Mount a pressure gauge on the
high pressure service port.
Reset the operation, and then
restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics of the NO
suction pipe thermistor Replace the relevant
normal? thermistor.
YES
Are the
discharge pipe NO
thermistor characteristics Replace the discharge
normal? pipe thermistor.
YES
Are the
high pressure sensor NO
characteristics Replace the high
normal? pressure sensor
(S1NPH).
YES
Service Checker
Use the Service Checker to find indoor units
operating under the following conditions:
& • Gas pipe temperature (R6T) - Liquid pipe temperature (R4T) < 2.5˚C
• Electronic expansion valve opening < 300 pulse
Stop the relevant indoor units while

the system is in cooling operation,
and then check for the liquid pipe
temperature of these indoor units
after the system is stabilized.
The liquid pipe

temperature is low YES
(equivalent to the evaporating Replace the indoor
temperature). electronic expansion
valve.
NO
Clean the air filters
of the indoor units.

5.30 Refrigerant Overcharged

Models
Error Code F6
Method of Error Detect overcharged refrigerant according to outdoor air temperature, heat exchanger liquid pipe
Detection temperature, and subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe temperature during test operation.
Error Decision When the amount of refrigerant, which is calculated using outdoor air temperature, heat
Conditions exchanger liquid pipe temperature, and subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe temperature
during test operation, exceeds the regular charge amount by 30% or more
(If refrigerant is charged slightly over the regular charge amount, F6 may be displayed on the
remote controller.)
Supposed  Refrigerant overcharged

Causes  Disconnection of outdoor air thermistor
 Disconnection of heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
 Disconnection of subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
Troubleshooting
Check for the conditions of

mounting of the temperature
sensors of the outdoor air
thermistor, the heat exchanger
liquid pipe thermistor, and
subcooling heating exchanger
liquid pipe thermistor to the piping.
Are the temperature NO

sensors properly Properly connect the thermistors,
mounted? and then operate the system.
YES
Disconnect the outdoor air
thermistor, the heat exchanger
liquid pipe thermistor, and
subcooling heating exchanger
liquid pipe thermistor from the
outdoor unit main PCB, and
then make measurement of
resistance using a multimeter.
CHECK 11 NO
Replace abnormal thermistors,
Normal? and then operate the system.
YES
Remedy refrigerant overcharging.

5.31 Harness Abnormality (between Outdoor Unit Main PCB

and Inverter PCB)
Models
Error Code H3
Method of Error Check for the transmission conditions of the following harnesses between the PCBs using
Detection microcomputer:
 RXQ6-14A: Inverter 1
Between X28A (A1P) and X6A (A3P)
 RXQ16-20A: Inverter 2
Error Decision When normal transmission between PCBs is disabled during the compressor stops running.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection of harnesses between PCBs

Causes  Defective outdoor unit main PCB
 Defective inverter PCB (A3P, A6P)
Troubleshooting
Check for the transmission

conditions of the following
jumpers between the PCBs:
• RXQ6-14A
Between X28A (A1P) and
X6A (A3P)
• RXQ16-20A
X6A (A3P)
X6A (A6P)
YES
Harness error Return the relevant harness to
normal.
NO

PCB.
NO
H3 error recurs. Complete countermeasures.
YES
Replace the inverter PCB.
RXQ6-14A: A3P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P

5.32 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality

Models
Error Code H7
Method of Error Detect according to values detected with current sensor.
Detection
Error Decision When the current sensor is abnormal.

Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection/Short circuit in fan motor leads or disconnection of connector

Causes  Defective fan PCB (A4P, A7P)
Troubleshooting
Check for fan motor applicable to the error code H7 while in monitor mode.
• Sub code
Fan PCB (A7P): H07-21 (Master), H7-23 (Slave 1), H7-25 (Slave 2)
Fan PCB (A4P): H07-22 (Master), H7-24 (Slave 1), H7-26 (Slave 2)

and wait for 10 minutes.
Is
resistance
between Vcc-UVW
and between GND-UVW NO Replace the defective fan motor.
of the fan motor lead in
balance?
YES
Replace the defective fan PCB.
RXQ6-12A: A4P
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P

5.33 Thermistor Abnormality

Models
Error Code H9, J3, J5, J7, J8, J9

Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with individual thermistors.
Detection
Error Decision When the system is in operation and the thermistor causes wiring disconnection or short circuit
Conditions in it.
Supposed  Defective connection of thermistor

Causes  Defective thermistor
Troubleshooting
Thermistor is NO
connected to the Connect the connector and turn
connector. ON again.
YES
CHECK 11
Resistance is
normal when
measured after NO
disconnecting the Replace the thermistor (1).
thermistor from the
outdoor unit
main PCB.
YES
PCB (A1P).

Note(s) 1. Error codes and thermistors

RXQ6-14A RXQ16-20A
Error Applicable
Code Thermistor Electric Electric
Connector Connector
symbol symbol
H9 Outdoor air R1T X18A R1T X18A
Discharge pipe
thermistor R21T R21T
(for M1C)
Discharge pipe
thermistor — X19A (Group R22T X19A (Group
J3 (for M2C) connector) connector)
Compressor body
R8T R8T
thermistor (for M1C)
Compressor body
— R9T
thermistor (for M2C)
J5 Suction pipe R3T R3T
Subcooling heat
J7 exchanger liquid pipe R5T R5T
thermistor
X30A (Group X30A (Group
Heat exchanger connector) connector)
J8 R4T R4T
liquid pipe thermistor
Subcooling heat
J9 exchanger gas pipe R6T R6T
thermistor

5.34 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Models
Error Code JA
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the high pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision The high pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Conditions (Pressure range: 0-4.3 MPa)
Supposed  Defective high pressure sensor

Causes  Connection of low pressure sensor in mistake for high pressure sensor
 Defective connection of high pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the

high pressure service port.
(2) Connect the Service Checker for
VRV systems.
Are the
characteristics of the
high pressure sensor
normal? (Make a comparison NO
between voltage characteristics Replace the high pressure sensor
and gauge pressure.) (S1NPH).
CHECK 12
YES
Is the outdoor
unit main PCB
detection pressure normal?
Make a comparison between data NO
on pressure checked by the Service Replace the outdoor unit main
Checker and the voltage PCB (A1P).
characteristics.
CHECK 12
YES
restart it.
Are the
characteristics of the high NO
pressure sensor normal? Replace the high pressure sensor
(S1NPH).
YES
PCB (A1P).

5.35 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Models
Error Code JC
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the low pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision The low pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Conditions (Pressure range: 0-1.7 MPa)
Supposed  Defective low pressure sensor

Causes  Connection of high pressure sensor in mistake for low pressure sensor
 Defective connection of low pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the

low pressure service port.
(2) Connect the Service Checker for
VRV systems.
Are the
characteristics of
the low pressure
sensor normal? (Make a NO
comparison between voltage Replace the low pressure sensor
characteristics and gauge (S1NPL).
pressure.)
CHECK 12
YES
Is the
outdoor unit main
PCB detection pressure
normal? Make a comparison NO
between data on pressure checked by Replace the outdoor unit main
the Service Checker and the PCB (A1P).
voltage characteristics.
CHECK 12
YES
restart it.
Are the
characteristics of the low NO
pressure sensor Replace the low pressure sensor
normal? (S1NPL).
YES
PCB (A1P).

5.36 Inverter PCB Abnormality

Models
Error Code L1
Method of Error  Detect according to current value detected during the output of waveform before compressor
Detection startup
 Detect according to current value detected with the current sensor during synchronous
operation for startup
Error Decision  When overcurrent flows during the output of waveform

Conditions  When the current sensor error during synchronous operation
 When IPM error occurs
Supposed  Inverter PCB

Causes  IPM failure
 Current sensor failure
 Drive circuit failure

Troubleshooting

once, and then turn it ON
again.
YES The error could have resulted from

Return to normal?
external factors other than failures
(e.g. external noise or thunder).
NO

For the models equipped with
2 compressors, check the
compressor M1C or M2C
applicable to the error code L1
while in monitor mode of the
outdoor unit.
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
transistor normal?
Is the
YES insulation to
ground resistance of the NO Replace the compressor (1) and
relevant compressor 100
kΩ or more? the inverter PCB (2) together.
YES
Replace the inverter PCB. (2)
CHECK 4
Is the power NO Replace the inverter PCB (2) and
transistor of the fan
driver normal? the fan PCB (3).
YES
Replace the inverter PCB. (2)
1
RXQ6-14A: M1C
RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
#2
RXQ6-14A: A3P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
#3
RXQ6-12A: A4P
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P

5.37 Momentary Power Failure during Test Operation

Models
Error Code L2
Method of Error Momentary power failure is detected by the PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Judgment is made by AC power frequency detection circuit on the outdoor unit main PCB
Conditions
Supposed  Defective wiring

Troubleshooting
Error
recurs after NO
turning OFF the power Temporary problem
and ON again.
YES
Any
disconnection
of connectors, loose
contact or wiring disconnection YES
Correct any fault.
in the transmission wirings to
the outdoor unit main
PCB?
NO
main PCB (A1P).

5.38 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality

Models
Error Code L4
Method of Error Detect temperature of power module of the inverter PCB and fan PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Thermistor located inside the power module of the inverter PCB for compressor and fan motor.
Conditions Cooling tube plate poor heat-exchange.
Supposed  Radiation fin temperature rise of fan PCB.

Causes  Cooling tube plate not fixed with screws.
 U0 error.
 Defective inverter PCB.
 High outdoor air temperature.
Troubleshooting  Subcode L4-01, 02, 03, 09, 10, 11


applicable to the error code
L4 while in monitor mode of
the outdoor unit.
Check for the cooling

conditions of cooling tube
used to cool the inverter.
(1) Is the cooling tube plate
fixed with screws?
(2) Error code U0 is displayed
on the Error History
screen.
NO
Normal? Rectify troubles.
YES
Turn ON the
power supply, and then YES
press the ON button Replace the inverter PCB.
continuously. Does RXQ6-14A: A3P
the error RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
recur?
NO
Continue operation.
Field factor. Power module temperature
may have risen due to high outdoor air
temperature.

 Subcode L4-06, 07, 18, 19, 20, 21

Check the cooling conditions

of the inverter heat sink.
(1) Is the insulation sheet
(blue) properly fixed?
(2) Is the heat sink properly
fixed with screws?
(3) Error code U0 is displayed
on the Error History screen.
Normal? NO Rectify troubles.
YES
Turn
ON the power
supply. Does the error YES Replace the fan PCB.
recur when operation RXQ6-12A: A4P
starts? RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P
NO
Continue operation.
Field factor. Heat sink radiation fin
temperature may have risen due to
high outdoor air temperature.

5.39 Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent

Models
Error Code L5
Method of Error Detect current flowing through the power transistor.
Detection
Error Decision The current exceeds A (A) instantaneously in the power transistor.
Conditions Trigger point
Compressor model A (A)
JT1GUVDYR 41.9
JT16KCVDYR 64.2
Supposed  Defective compressor coil (such as wiring disconnection or insulation failure)

Causes  Compressor startup failure (mechanical lock)
Troubleshooting

outdoor unit.
NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Check for the leads of the
compressor.
Power OFF • For compressor M2C
Are the
leads of the relevant NO
Replace the leads of the
compressor normal? relevant compressor.
YES
Are
wiring and wire NO
connections to the relevant Rectify the wiring and
compressor wire connections.
normal?
YES

Power OFF The

insulation
resistance of the relevant YES
compressor is 100 kΩ Replace the
or less. compressor.(1)
1
RXQ6-14A: M1C
NO RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
The coil
of the relevant YES
compressor has caused Replace the
wiring disconnection compressor.(1)
in it.
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power Replace the inverter
transistor normal? PCB. (2)
2
RXQ6-14A: A3P
YES
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Restarting the NO
system results in the Continue operation.
recurrence of the
( )
error. The error could have
resulted from causes
YES such as instantaneous
power failure.
Power OFF Replace the inverter PCB
(#2).
Restarting
the system results in NO
the recurrence of the Continue operation.
error.
YES
Replace the
compressor.(1)

5.40 Compressor Overcurrent

Models
Error Code L8
Method of Error Detect current flowing through the power transistor.
Detection
Error Decision (1) The secondary-side inverter current exceeds A (A) for a period of 5 consecutive seconds.
Conditions (2) The secondary-side inverter current exceeds B (A) for a period of 260 consecutive seconds.
Trigger point
Compressor model A (A) B (A)
JT1GUVDYR 21.0 17.6
JT16KCVDYR 30.0 27.5
Supposed  Compressor overloaded

Causes  Wiring disconnection in compressor coil
 Disconnection of compressor wiring
Troubleshooting

outdoor unit.
NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Check for the leads of the
compressor.
Power OFF • For compressor M1C
Are the
leads of the relevant NO
compressor Replace the leads of the
normal? relevant compressor.
YES
Are
wiring and wire NO
connections to the relevant Rectify the wiring and
compressor wire connections.
normal?
YES

Power OFF The

insulation
resistance of the YES
relevant compressor is Replace the compressor.
1 MΩ or less to (#1)
ground. #1
RXQ6-14A: M1C
NO RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
The coil
of the relevant YES
compressor has caused Replace the
wiring disconnection compressor. (#1)
in it.
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power Replace the inverter
transistor normal? PCB. (#2)
#2
RXQ6-14A: A3P
YES RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Restarting the NO
recurrence of the
( )
The error could have
error. resulted from causes
YES such as instantaneous
power failure.
Power OFF Replace the inverter PCB
(#2).
Restarting the NO
recurrence of the
error.
YES
Replace the
compressor. (#1)

5.41 Compressor Startup Abnormality

Models
Error Code L9
Method of Error Detect error according to the signal waveform of compressor.
Detection
Error Decision When compressor startup operation has not been completed.
Conditions
Supposed  The stop valve is not opened

Causes  Defective compressor
 Error in wire connections to compressor
 Large differential pressure before compressor startup

Troubleshooting
Startup for NO
the first time after A Go to the next page
installation?
YES
Is a proper NO
amount of refrigerant Charge a proper amount of
charged? refrigerant.
YES
Is the stop valve NO

open?
YES
Refrigerant
is stagnated. YES
(The unit is out of power Solve the refrigerant stagnation.
supply for more than 6 (Power should be supplied for more
hours.) than 6 hours.)
NO
outdoor unit.
Is the
insulation NO
resistance of the relevant Solve the refrigerant stagnation.
compressor 100 kΩ (Power should be supplied for more
or more? than 6 hours.)
YES
Are the
leads of the YES
compressor Connect the leads of the compressor.
disconnected?
NO
Apply power, and then restart
operation.

Refrigerant is
stagnated. (The unit is YES
out of power supply for Solve the refrigerant stagnation.
more than 6 (Power should be supplied for more
hours.) than 6 hours.)
NO
Is the
insulation
resistance of the NO
relevant compressor Replace the compressor.(#1)
100 kΩ or #1
more? RXQ6-14A: M1C
YES RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
The internal YES

wiring of the compressor Replace the compressor.(#1)
coil is defective.
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power Replace the inverter PCB.
transistor normal? RXQ6-14A: A3P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
YES
Recheck for the compressor and the

refrigerant system.

5.42 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and Outdoor

Unit Main PCB
Models
Error Code LC
Method of Error Check for the transmission conditions between the inverter PCB and the outdoor unit main PCB
Detection using a microcomputer.
Error Decision Normal transmission is disabled for a given period of time or more.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection between the inverter PCB and the outdoor unit main PCB
Causes  Defective outdoor unit main PCB (transmission block)
 Defective noise filter
 Defective reactor
 Defective inverter compressor
Troubleshooting
Is the harness
between terminal NO
block and noise filter PCB Properly connect the harness.
securely connected?
(∗1)
YES
Is the harness
between noise filter NO
PCB and inverter PCB Properly connect the harness.
securely connected?
(∗1)
YES
Is the harness
between reactor and NO
inverter PCB securely Properly connect the harness.
connected? (∗1)
YES
Is the
connector between
main PCB and each inverter NO Properly connect the connector.
PCB securely
connected?
(∗1)
YES


For the models equipped with 2 compressors, check
the compressor M1C or M2C applicable to the error
code LC while in monitor mode of the outdoor unit.
Does the
relevant inverter PCB part No. NO Replace with a proper PCB.
match that of the spare parts
list?
YES
The
insulation
resistance of the relevant YES Replace the compressor.
inverter compressor is
not more than RXQ6-14A: M1C
100 kΩ. RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
NO
The insulation
resistance of the YES Replace the fan motor.
relevant fan motor is
not more than
1 MΩ.
NO
The
microcomputer normal
monitor indication lamp (green) NO This is not the LC error.
on the outdoor unit main Recheck the error code.
PCB (A1P) is
blinking.
YES
The
microcomputer normal The fuse of the
monitor indication lamp (green) NO NO
noise filter PCB has blown Replace the inverter PCB. (#1)
on the outdoor unit main out. #1
PCB (A1P) is RXQ6-14A: A3P
blinking. RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
YES
YES
Replace the reactor and all of the

inverter (#1), fan (#2),
and noise filter (#3) PCBs.
#2
RXQ6-12A: A4P
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P
#3
RXQ6-12A: A2P
RXQ14A: A5P
RXQ16-20A: A2P, A5P
Is the
connector
between the outdoor unit NO
main PCB and the inverter Properly connect the connector.
PCB securely
connected?
YES
YES Replace the outdoor unit main PCB

The LC error recurs.
(A1P).
NO
Continue operation.
The error could have resulted from
causes such as instantaneous
power failure.
Note(s) 1. Connect and disconnect the connector once to ensure that it is securely connected.

5.43 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance

Models
Error Code P1
Method of Error Detect voltage imbalance through inverter PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Power supply voltage imbalance exceeds approximately 12 V.

Conditions
Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
P1 will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed  Open phase

Causes  Interphase voltage imbalance
 Defective capacitor in the main circuit
 Defective wiring in the main circuit

Troubleshooting

applicable to the error code P1
outdoor unit.
Is supply
voltage imbalance YES Open phase? YES Correct the open phase of
over approximately
12 V? (∗1) power supply.
NO NO
Rectify the power supply
voltage imbalance.
Take countermeasures (listed
Is the below).
imbalance of voltage YES
applied to the inverter over Defective noise filter, inverter
approximately 12 V? PCB or defective wiring
(∗2) Turn OFF the power supply,
and then check and repair
NO wirings in the main circuit and
<If voltage can be monitored> defective components.
(1) Defective connection or
Use equipment capable of constantly wiring disconnection
recording power supply voltages (e.g. between the power supply
Memory HiCorder) to record power and the inverter
supply voltages between phases (2) Adhesion/meltdown of
(R-S, S-T, and R-T) for a period of contact of, or defective
consecutive 1 week. connection of K1M
(3) Wiring disconnection or
defective connection of
noise filter
Even though the power Power supply voltage imbalance Even
supply voltage is normal, the though power supply voltage remains
error recurs. balanced when making measurement,
it often becomes imbalanced during
night-time (from 6:00 PM to 10:00 PM).
Take countermeasures.
Replace the inverter PCB.
RXQ6-14A: A3P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Explanation to users ∗ Use the document “Notice of Inspection Results” attached to spare part.
Be sure to explain user that “power supply
Hand the “Notice of Inspection Results” to user to ask
voltage imbalance” will occur and Daikin
him/her to rectify the imbalance.
accepts no responsibility for the imbalance.
Note(s) 1. Make measurement of voltage at the power supply terminal block (X1M).
2. Make measurement of voltage at the L1, L2 and L3 terminals of diode module located on the
inverter PCB during the compressor is in operation.

5.44 Reactor Temperature Abnormality

Models
Error Code P3
Method of Error Detect according to the value detected with the reactor surface thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision When the system is in operation and the thermistor causes wiring disconnection or short circuit
Conditions in it.
Supposed  Defective connection of thermistor

Causes  Defective reactor surface thermistor
Troubleshooting

P3 while in monitor mode of
the outdoor unit.
Make measurement of
resistance of the radiation
fin thermistor.
Is the
thermistor normal? Replace the inverter PCB. (#1)
#1
YES RXQ6-14A: A3P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Turn ON the YES

power supply. Replace the inverter PCB. (#1)
Does the error
recur?
NO
Continue operation.

5.45 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality

Models
Error Code P4
Method of Error Detect the resistance of the following thermistors during the compressor stops running:
Detection (1) Radiation fin thermistor
(2) Thermistor located in PCB circuit
Error Decision When the resistance of the thermistor comes to a value equivalent to open or short circuit.
Conditions
Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
P4 will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed  Defective radiation fin temperature thermistor

Causes  Defective inverter PCB
 Defective fan PCB
 Defective inverter compressor

Troubleshooting  Subcode P4-01, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08


P4 while in monitor mode of
the outdoor unit.
Make measurement of
resistance of the radiation
fin thermistor.
Is the
relevant thermistor Replace the inverter PCB. (#1)
normal? #1
RXQ6-14A: A3P
The
insulation
relevant inverter compressor Replace the compressor.
is not more than RXQ6-14A: M1C
100 kΩ. RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
NO
The insulation
resistance of the relevant YES
fan motor is not more
than 1 MΩ.
NO
Turn ON the
power supply. YES
Replace the inverter PCB. (#1)
Does the error
recur?
NO
Continue operation.
 Subcode P4-02, 03, 15, 16, 17, 18

The insulation
relevant fan motor is
less than 1 MΩ.
NO
Turn ON
the power supply. YES
Replace the relevant fan
Does the error recur?
PCB.
RXQ6-12A: A4P
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P
NO
Continue operation.

5.46 Field Setting after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB

Abnormality or Combination of PCB Abnormality
Models
Error Code PJ
Method of Error This error is detected according to communications with the inverter PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Make judgement according to communication data on whether or not the type of the inverter
Conditions PCB is correct.
Supposed  Mismatching of type of PCB

Causes  Improper (or no) field setting after replacing outdoor unit main PCB
Troubleshooting

applicable to the error code PJ
outdoor unit.
Does
the inverter PCB NO
(1) part No. match that Replace with a correct
of the spare parts inverter PCB. (#1)
list? #1
YES RXQ6-14A: A3P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Does the
fan PCB (2) part NO
No. match that of the Replace with a correct fan
spare parts PCB. (#2)
list? #2
YES RXQ6-12A: A4P
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P
Has the
DIP switch setting
been made properly to NO
Properly make DIP switch
replace the outdoor unit setting.
main PCB? (After completion of setting,
reset the power supply.)
YES
main PCB (A1P).

5.47 Refrigerant Shortage Warning

Models
Error Code U0
Sub code: 05
Method of Error Detects refrigerant shortage according to the ending conditions of cooling oil return operation.
Detection
Error Decision Cooling oil return operation does not finish according to the ending conditions, and the time is
Conditions up for 3 consecutive times.
 No abnormality is determined, and the operation continues.
Supposed  Refrigerant shortage and refrigerant clogging (wrong piping)

Causes  Defective thermistor
 Defective low pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
Are the
suction air thermistor Replace the thermistor.
normal?
YES
Are the
low pressure sensor Replace the low pressure
normal? sensor.
YES
CHECK 2 CHECK 2
NO YES
Is refrigerant shortage detected Is another cause detected as a Correct the abnormally low
as a cause of abnormally cause of abnormally low pressure.
low pressure? pressure?
YES NO
CHECK 3 CHECK 3
NO YES
Is refrigerant shortage detected Is another cause detected Correct the superheat
as a cause of superheat as a cause of superheat operation.
operation? operation?
YES NO
CHECK 7 YES
Is refrigerant Correct the insufficient low
insufficient? refrigerant condition.
NO
main PCB (A1P).


5.48 Open Phase

Models
Error Code U1
Method of Error The phase of each phase is detected by phase detection circuit and open phase is judged.
Detection
Error Decision When any phase is open phase.

Conditions
Supposed  Abnormal supply voltage

Causes  Open phase
Troubleshooting
Power
supply harness
(3-phase, 4 wires) is NO
properly connected to Connect the harness properly.
the terminal
block.
YES
Power supply
voltage falls within NO
380 V to 415 V between Check the power supply for
L1-L2, L2-L3 abnormalities.
and L3-L1.
YES
The connectors
between the terminal
block, noise filter PCB and NO
Connect the connectors properly.
inverter PCB are properly
connected.
YES
The fuse of the noise NO

filter PCB is blown out. Replace the inverter PCB. (#1)
#1
RXQ6-14A: A3P
Replace the noise filter PCB (#2) and

the inverter PCB (#1).
#2
RXQ6-14A: A2P
RXQ16-20A: A2P, A5P

5.49 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality

Models
Error Code U2
Method of Error Detect the voltage of capacitor of the main circuit in the inverter PCB.
Detection
Error Decision When the voltage in the DC circuit (between diode module and power module) falls below
Conditions 380 VDC.
Supposed  Abnormal power supply voltage

Causes  Instantaneous power failure
 Open phase
 Defective compressor
 Defective main circuit wiring
 Defective connection of signal cable
Troubleshooting

applicable to the error code U2
outdoor unit.
Check for power supply

conditions.
(1) Power supply voltage falls
within the range of 380 to
415 V?
(2) Any open phase in the
power supply wiring or
any wrong wiring?
(3) Imbalance in the power
supply voltage is
maintained within 12 V?
There are some

defects in the power YES
supply conditions Remedy the defects.
aforementioned.
NO
The insulation
compressor is not more Replace the compressor.
than 100 kΩ. RXQ6-14A: M1C
RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
NO

The insulation
resistance of the fan YES
motor is not more
than 1 MΩ. If the motor gets severely
damaged, the inverter
PCB (#1) should also be
NO replaced.
#1
RXQ6-12A: A4P
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power Replace the inverter PCB.
transistor normal? (1)
YES RXQ6-14A RXQ16-20A

A1P A3P A1P A3P A6P
Connect and disconnect the X20A X4A X20A X4A
connectors as shown in the X28A X6A X28A X6A
table. X40A X63A X40A X63A
X41A X63A
X41A X4A
X61A X6A
The YES
inverter PCB (#1) Replace the inverter PCB
has damage. (#1).
If the inverter PCB gets
NO severely damaged, the
compressor and the fan
motor may have been
Turn ON the power supply, damaged.
and then press the ON button.
The
system enters
standby mode before the YES
Replace the inverter PCB
outdoor fan starts
rotating. (#1).
NO
The
system enters
standby mode before YES
completing the startup Replace the inverter PCB
operation of the (#1).
compressor. If the inverter PCB gets
severely damaged, check
NO for the compressor.
YES
The error U2 recurs. Check for wirings.
NO
Continue operation.
The error could have
resulted from causes such
as instantaneous power
failure.

5.50 Check Operation Not Executed

Models
Error Code U3
Method of Error The check operation has not been executed.
Detection
Error Decision Error is decided when the unit starts operation without check operation.
Conditions
Supposed  Check operation not executed

Causes
Troubleshooting
The contents of individual

failures vary with sub code.
Ensure the sub code, and
then go to the following:
U3-02 Conduct the test operation.

(Test operation failed due
to indoor unit error.)
U3-03 Conduct the test operation.

(The test operation has not
been conducted.)
U3-04 Check for the refrigerant

piping, and then conduct
the test operation.
U3-05 Conduct the test operation

(due to the premature end
of the test operation).
U3-06 Conduct the test operation

(due to the premature end
of the test operation).
U3-07 Check for transmission

between indoor and
outdoor units, and then
conduct the test operation.
U3-08 Check for transmission

between indoor and
outdoor units, and then
conduct the test operation.
U3-10 Conduct the refrigerant

auto charge operation.
(The refrigerant auto
charge operation has not
been conducted.)

5.51 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor

Units
Models All outdoor unit models
Error Code U4
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor and outdoor units is normal.
Detection
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed  Short circuit in indoor-outdoor or outdoor-outdoor transmission wiring (F1/F2), or wrong

Causes wiring
 Outdoor unit power supply is OFF
 System address does not match
 Defective outdoor unit PCB

Troubleshooting
Check for details of error in

monitor mode.
NO
U4-01 Go to the next page.
U4-03
YES (Indoor unit system
transmission error)
Has the
indoor or
outdoor unit PCB
been replaced, or has YES
the indoor-outdoor or Press and hold RETURN
outdoor-outdoor (BS3) on the master outdoor
transmission unit main PCB (A1P) for a
wiring been period of 5 seconds or more.
modified? (The system will not operate
for a period of 12 minutes at
maximum.)
NO
Do all Are the
indoor unit indoor-outdoor and
remote controllers in NO YES
outdoor-outdoor Replace the indoor unit PCB.
the same refrigerant transmission wirings
system display normal?
U4?
YES NO
Modify the transmission
wirings.
Reset the power supply once.
Correct the voltage.
Does the 1 :OFF :ON :BLINK

microcomputer Is voltage
normal monitor indication NO between L1 and N NO (1) SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
lamp (HAP) on the terminals of the outdoor unit
outdoor unit main PCB 380 to 415 V?
PCB blink?
(2)
YES YES
Does the Fuse on the

seven-segment display NO YES
outdoor unit main PCB
show (1) or (2)? has blown out.
(1)
Replace the fuse.
YES NO
The lamp main PCB (A1P).
does not turn OFF YES
for a period of 12 minutes Press and hold RETURN
or more. (BS3) on the outdoor unit
main PCB (A1P) for a period
of 5 seconds or more.
NO
Are the
indoor-outdoor and NO
outdoor-outdoor transmission Modify the transmission
wirings normal? wirings.
YES
Disconnect the
outdoor-outdoor NO
transmission wiring. Replace the outdoor unit main
Does the system normally PCB (A1P).
operate with a single
transmission
line?
YES
Mount the DIII-NET extension
adaptor.

U4-03
Indication YES
after launch test Check controller indoor units:
operation? (1) Some error about
thermistor, or fan motor,
electronic expansion
NO valve, or defective PCB.
(2) Test operation was
Operate all indoor units. interrupted by the MODE
(BS1) button.
NO
Do all units display U9? Check all indoor error
indication.
YES
Did 2 minutes or more NO

elapse after U9 is Carry out the diagnosis again
displayed? after a lapse of 2 minutes or
more.
YES
The PCBs of indoor units

displaying U9 are normal.
Check for indoor units of
other systems to troubleshoot
them according to relevant
error codes.

5.52 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and

Indoor Unit
Models
Error code U5
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and remote controller is normal.
Detection
Error Decision When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between indoor unit and remote controller

Causes  Connection of 2 main remote controllers (when using 2 remote controllers)
 Defective remote controller PCB
 Transmission error caused by noise
Troubleshooting
Main/Sub
Control by 2 YES setting of both YES
remote controllers remote controllers is Set one of the remote
set to Main. controllers to Sub, turn OFF
the power supply temporarily,
NO then restart operation.
NO
Resets
All indoor unit NO normally when NO
PCB microcomputer power supply is turned Replace the indoor unit
normal monitors OFF temporarily. PCB.
blinking
YES YES
The error could be produced by
Replace the remote controller noise. Check the surrounding
and restart operation. area and restart operation. (Ex.:
Heavy-duty wireless equipment,
etc.)
YES
Is operation normal? Normal.
NO

and restart operation.
YES
Is operation normal? Normal.
NO
The error could be produced by
noise. Check the surrounding
area and restart operation.
Reference Refer to page 64 for Main/Sub setting.

5.53 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units

Models
Error Code U7
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between outdoor units is normal.
Detection
Error Decision When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Conditions
Supposed  Connection error of transmission wirings between outdoor unit and external control adaptor
Causes for outdoor unit
 Connection error of transmission wirings between outdoor units
 Defective external control adaptor for outdoor unit

Troubleshooting
Ensure the sub code or

the lamp display of
monitor mode, and then
go to the following:
U7-01
Error code Sub code
Go to Diagnosis Flowchart-1.
(Transmission error when the
external control adaptor is
mounted)
U7-03
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between
master and slave 1)
U7-04
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between
master and slave 2)
U7-05
Error code Sub code
(Multi system error)
U7-06
Error code Sub code
(Manual address setting error for
slave 1, 2)
U7-07
Error code Sub code
(Connection 4 or more outdoor
units to the same system)
U7-11
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor
units for test operation)

Diagnosis Flowchart-1
U7-01
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error when the

external control adaptor is mounted)
Is
there any
wiring
disconnection or wiring NO
error in the transmission Modify the transmission wirings
wirings to the external to the external control adaptor for
control adaptor for outdoor unit.
outdoor unit?
YES
Is the
normal
operation monitor LED NO Is power supplied to NO
on the outdoor unit the outdoor unit? Supply power to the outdoor
main PCB unit.
blinking?
YES YES
PCB (A1P).
Is the
Is the power
normal supply cable of the
operation monitor LED NO external control adaptor NO
on the external control for outdoor unit connected Connect the power supply cable
adaptor for outdoor to the16 VDC power of the external control adaptor
unit blinking? supply line? for outdoor unit to the 16 VDC
power supply line.
YES YES
Replace the external control
adaptor PCB.
main PCB (A1P).

U7-03
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between master

and slave 1)
The
multi transmission
wirings to multi slave 1 have NO
caused wiring disconnection in Replace the outdoor unit main
them or are being PCB (A1P) for multi slave 1.
disconnected.
YES
Modify the outdoor unit multi

transmission wirings, and then
reset the power supply.
U7-04
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between master

and slave 2)
The
multi transmission
wirings to multi slave 2 NO
have caused wiring disconnection in Replace the outdoor unit main
them or are being PCB (A1P) for multi slave 2.
disconnected.
YES

U7-05
Error code Sub code
(Multi system error)
Multi outdoor unit NO

system?
PCB (A1P).
YES
Disconnect the outdoor unit multi


U7-06
Error code Sub code
(Manual address setting error for

slave 1, 2)
One of
outdoor unit
multi transmission wirings has NO
caused wiring disconnection in it Replace the outdoor unit main
or been disconnected. PCB (A1P).
YES
U7-07
Error code Sub code
(Connection of 4 or more outdoor units

in the same system)
4 or
more outdoor
units are connected using NO
the outdoor unit multi Replace the outdoor unit main
transmission PCB (A1P).
wirings.
YES

U7-11
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor units

for test operation)
There
is an error in
the connection of YES
indoor-outdoor, indoor-indoor, Rectify the error in the connection
and outdoor multi of transmission wirings, and then
transmission reset the power supply.
wirings.
NO
The
capacity to
connect indoor units NO
Check the capacity to connect
falls within the specified
range. indoor units.
YES
PCB (A1P).

5.54 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote

Controllers
Models
Error code U8
Method of Error In case of controlling with 2 remote controllers, check the system using microcomputer if signal
Detection transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub remote controller) is
normal.
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between main and sub remote controller

Causes  Connection between sub remote controllers
 Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Main/Sub
Using 2 remote NO setting of the remote NO
controllers control. Set Main/Sub setting of the
controller is set to remote controller to Main.
Main. Turn OFF the power supply,
YES YES and restart operation.
Main/Sub
setting of both remote NO
controllers are set to Turn the power OFF and
Sub. then restart. If an error
occurs, replace the remote
YES controller PCB.
Set Main/Sub setting of one
remote controller to Main.
and restart operation.
Reference Refer to page 64 for Main/Sub setting.

5.55 Other Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit Abnormality

Error Code U9
Method of Error Detect the error signal for the other indoor unit within the circuit by outdoor unit main PCB.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made on any other indoor units within the system concerned.
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between other indoors and outdoor units

Causes  Defective electronic expansion valve of other indoor unit
 Defective indoor unit PCB of other indoor unit
 Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Troubleshooting
Turn ON all indoor units.
All the units are NO

Continue the operation.
display U9.
YES
U9 has
been displayed for 2 NO
Re-diagnose by display after
minutes or more. passage of 2 minutes or more.
YES
The outdoor unit PCB indicated
by the error code U9 is normal.
Check for the indoor unit of other
system, and then conduct
troubleshooting by diagnosis
according to the Error Code
Flowchart.


Indoor Unit and Remote Controller
Error Code UA
Method of Error A difference occurs in data by the type of refrigerant between indoor and outdoor units.
Detection The number of indoor units connected is out of the allowable range.
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as either of the abnormalities aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed  Excess of connected indoor units

 Mismatch of the refrigerant type of indoor and outdoor unit.
 Setting of outdoor unit main PCB was not carried out after replacing to spare PCB.
Troubleshooting
Ensure the sub code or

the lamp display of
monitor mode, and then
go to the following:
UA-17
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor
units)
UA-18
Error code Sub code
(Connection of incorrect models
of indoor units)
UA-20
Error code Sub code
(Improper combination of outdoor
units)
UA-21
Error code Sub code
(Wrong connection)
UA-31
Error code Sub code
(Multi system combination error)

UA-17
Error code Sub code
The
number of indoor
units connected to the YES
same system is not
more than 64. PCB (A1P).
NO
Excess indoor units are
connected.
Diagnosis Flowchart-2 Check for the connection to
connect the proper number of
UA-18 indoor units.
Error code Sub code
Check if the
refrigerant type of YES
the outdoor unit Replace the outdoor unit main
corresponds to that PCB (A1P).
of the indoor
unit.
NO
Match the refrigerant types of the
outdoor unit and the indoor unit.
UA-20
Error code Sub code
NO
Multi connection? Replace the outdoor unit main
PCB (A1P).
YES
Was the A
outdoor unit NO different model NO
main PCB replaced with a of outdoor unit is Replace the outdoor unit main
spare PCB? connected. PCB (A1P).
YES YES
Check for the model of outdoor
unit.
Was proper setting of NO

Make setting again, and then
spare PCB made? reset the power supply.
YES
Replace the spare PCB.

UA-21
Error code Sub code
PCB (A1P).
UA-31
Error code Sub code
Is the multi
combination of NO
Correct the multi combination of
outdoor units outdoor units.
proper?
YES
Was the
outdoor unit main NO
PCB replaced with a Replace the outdoor unit main
spare PCB? PCB (A1P).
YES
Is the
procurement of the NO
Procure a proper spare PCB.
spare PCB proper?
YES
Is the setting of the NO

Make setting again, and then reset
spare PCB proper? the power supply.
YES

PCB (A1P).

5.57 Address Duplication of Centralized Controller

Models Centralized controller
Error Code UC
Method of Error The principal indoor unit detects the same address as that of its own on any other indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed  Address duplication of centralized controller

Troubleshooting
The centralized address is

duplicated. Make setting change so that
the centralized address will
not be duplicated.

5.58 Transmission Error between Centralized Controller and

Indoor Unit
Models Schedule timer
Central remote controller
Error Code UE
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and centralized controller is normal.
Detection
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between optional controllers for centralized controller and indoor unit
Causes  Connector for setting main controller is disconnected.
(or disconnection of connector for independent / combined use changeover switch.)
 Defective PCB for central remote controller

Troubleshooting
Check
the indoor
unit for which
UE is displayed. Is YES
the transmission error
UE caused on
all indoor
units?
NO
Is the
power supply of NO
the indoor unit, on which Make sure there are no
the UE occurred, hazardous situations, and
turned ON? then turn ON the power
supply.
YES
Has
the setting of
central control Can the
NO setting of central YES
group No. been made with Make correct setting of the
the indoor unit on control group No be
made? central control group No.
which the UE
occurred?
NO
YES For
VRV systems,
can the setting of NO
central control group No. be Check outdoor units to which
made in one and the the refrigerant system is
same refrigerant connected.
system?
YES
Was the Check whether or not there
central control NO are no problems with the
group No. for indoor transmission wiring length,
unit changed? types of cables and wires,
number of units connected,
YES and others. If no problems,
replace the indoor unit PCB.
Reset the power supplies of
every centralized controller.
For the intelligent Touch
controller, register the air
conditioner again while in
DIII-NET test run menu.

Check the
transmission wiring
between centralized
controller for any broken wire. For NG
details, refer to information in the Correct the wiring.
“Procedure for checking broken
wires” section.
CHECK 15
OK
Check the
transmission
wiring between main
centralized controller for NG
any broken wire. For details, Correct the wiring.
refer to information in the
“Procedure for
checking broken
wires”
section.
OK
Has the main

centralized controller setting NO
connector been Correct the connection of the
connected? connector.
YES
Disconnect the transmission
wiring of the main centralized
controller, and then check the
voltage between the
transmission terminals (F1 and
F2) of the master unit
transmission equipment using
a multimeter.
Is the
voltage
between the NO
terminals F1 (+) and F2 (-) Replace the centralized
in the range of 15.2 controller.
to 17.6 VDC?
YES
Centralized controller:
Normal
It is supposed that the error

results from external factors
(e.g. noises) from other
equipment.

5.59 System Not Set Yet

Error Code UF
Method of Error On check operation, the number of indoor units in terms of transmission is not corresponding to
Detection that of indoor units that have made changes in temperature.
Error Decision The error is determined as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected through
Conditions checking the system for any erroneous connection of units on the check operation.
Supposed  Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units and outdoor-
Causes outdoor units
 Failure to execute check operation
 Stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
Are the stop NO

valves opened? Open the stop valve.
YES
Is
Is the check indoor-outdoor YES
NO and outdoor-outdoor unit
operation Replace the indoor unit PCB.
carried out? transmission wiring
normal?
YES
NO
Is
indoor-outdoor NO
and outdoor-outdoor unit After fixing incorrect wiring,
transmission wiring press and hold the RETURN
normal? (BS3) button on the outdoor
unit main PCB for 5 seconds.
YES The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Wiring check operation may

not have been carried out
successfully.

5.60 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address

Undefined
Error Code UH
Method of Error Detect an indoor unit with no auto address setting.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed  Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units and outdoor-
Causes outdoor units

Troubleshooting
Is Does
electricity an error
being introduced occur even after
for the first time after YES 12 minutes elapses NO
installation or after an indoor from the time when electricity Normal
or outdoor unit main is introduced to indoor
PCB has been and outdoor units?
replaced?
NO YES
Is
indoor-outdoor
and outdoor-outdoor NO
unit transmission After fixing incorrect wiring,
wiring normal? press and hold the RETURN
(BS3) button on the master
outdoor unit main PCB for 5
YES seconds.
The unit will not run for up to
Press and hold the RETURN 12 minutes.
(BS3) button on the outdoor
unit main PCB for 5 seconds
NO
Does an error occur? Normal
YES
Disconnect
the
outdoor-outdoor unit
transmission wiring to YES
create the one-system Mount the DIII-NET extension
status, and then check adaptor.
whether or not the
system is
normal.
NO
Does a UH
error occur for all NO
indoor units in the Replace the indoor unit PCB.
system?
YES
PCB (A1P).

SiAF341904E Check
6. Check
6.1 High Pressure Check
CHECK 1 Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points.
Stop valve closed ←Check to be sure the stop valve is open.

Local High pipe
pressure Bent or crushed pipe ←Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
rise resistance
Clogging of foreign ←Is there any temperature difference caused before
particles and after the filter or branch pipe?
Rise in high
pressure
Defective Defective high pressure sensor ←Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
high Defective corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
pressure control
control Defective outdoor unit main PCB ←Are the voltage characteristics normal?
In cooling
←Is the suction air temperature not more than
High suction Short circuit 43°C?
air High suction
air temperature
temperature of outdoor unit High outdoor air temperature ←Is the outdoor air temperature not more than
of the
condenser 43°C?
Degradation Dirty condenser ←Is the heat exchanger clogged? (In cooling)
in condensing
capacity
Mixing of non-condensable gas ←Is air or else mixed in the refrigerant system?
Defective fan ←Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?

Decreased motor Are the motor coil resistance and
fan insulation normal?
Decreased output Defective outdoor
fan airflow unit main PCB ←If a spare PCB is mounted, is the capacity
rate (Including setting properly made?
capacity setting)
High air Dirty filter ←Is the air filter clogged?

passage
resistance
Obstacle ←Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
Excessive refrigerant charging ←Refer to CHECK 6 .

Check SiAF341904E
6.2 Low Pressure Check

CHECK 2 Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points.
Defective low pressure sensor ←Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
Defective compressor
capacity Defective outdoor unit main PCB ←Are the voltage characteristics normal?
low pressure
control control
Defective low pressure sensor
←Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
low pressure
protection Defective hot gas solenoid valve ←Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
control
Defective outdoor unit main PCB ←Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Abnormally low In cooling
pressure
(Low evaporating If the indoor unit
temperature) electronic
expansion valve is
throttled too much: Defective indoor
Defective valve coil ←Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
unit electronic
expansion valve
Defective valve body
Defective electronic
expansion valve
Defective gas pipe ←Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
control
Defective thermistor of indoor unit
control
Defective liquid pipe ←Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
thermistor of indoor unit
Defective outdoor unit main PCB ←Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Low suction Low suction air Short circuit ←Is the suction air temperature not less than 14°C
air temperature temperature of
of the indoor unit Low room temperature ←Is the indoor temperature not more than 14°C
evaporator
←Is the connector properly connected?
Defective suction air thermistor of indoor unit
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
Abnormal piping length ←Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
High pipe ←Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
Bent or crushed pipe
resistance
Clogging of foreign particles ←Is there any temperature difference caused before
and after the filter or branch pipe?
Stop valve closed
←Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
Less
circulation
quantity of Refrigerant shortage ←Refer to CHECK 7 .
refrigerant
Moisture choke ←Eliminate moisture by vacuum operation.
Dirty
evaporator ←Is the heat exchanger clogged?
Degradation
in condensing Defective fan motor ←Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
capacity Decreased Are the motor coil resistance and insulation normal?
fan output Defective outdoor unit
main PCB (Including ←If a spare PCB is mounted, is the capacity
Decreased
fan airflow setting properly made?
capacity setting)
rate High airflow
passage Dirty filter ←Is the air filter clogged?
resistance
Obstacle ←Is there any obstacle in the air passage?

SiAF341904E Check
6.3 Superheat Operation Check

CHECK 3 Identify the defective points referring to the failure factor analysis (FTA) as follows.
Hot gas circuit clogging

Defective hot
gas bypass Defective solenoid
Check if coil resistance and insulation
control valve coil
are normal.
Defective solenoid
valve body
Defective outdoor unit main PCB
Defective valve coil

Check if coil resistance and
Subcooling insulation are normal.
Defective electronic Defective valve
discharge expansion body
pipe Defective valve failure Defective low
Check if the pressure value given by the
temperature subcooling pressure sensor service checker corresponding to actual
control electronic measurement value by the sensor.
expansion valve Control Defective subcooling
control (Y2E) failure heat exchanger outlet
Check if the connector is connected properly.
thermistor Check if the thermistor resistance property is
normal.
Temperature Defective outdoor
Check if the voltage property is
increase of unit main PCB normal.
discharge
pipe
Superheat due to
Compressor shaft damage
overheat Superheat due to
defective compressor
If the indoor unit

electronic
expansion valve is
excessively
throttled. (1)
Defective Indoor unit

Defective valve coil
Check if coil resistance and insulation are
superheated electronic
expansion normal.
degree
control. valve failure Defective valve body
Refrigerant
Refer to CHECK 7
shortage
Irregular piping length
Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
Bend/collapse
Conduct visual checks.
Large resistance
of piping (Including moisture choke)
Remove the moisture by vacuum break. (Refer to CHECK 8)
Stop valve is closed.

Check if the stop valve is open.
Note(s) 1. “Superheating temperature control” in cooling mode is conducted by indoor unit electronic
expansion valve.
2. Judgment criteria of superheat operation:
(1) Suction gas superheating temperature: 10 degrees and over.
(2) Discharge gas superheating temperature: 45 degrees and over, except for immediately after
starting and dropping control, etc.
(Use the above stated values as a guide. Depending on the other conditions, the unit may be
normal despite the values within the above scope.)

Check SiAF341904E
6.4 Power Transistor Check

CHECK 4 Perform the following procedures prior to check.
(1) Power OFF.
(2) Remove all the wiring connected to the PCB where power transistors are mounted on.
Preparation  Prepare the analog type of multimeter.

Multimeter For the digital type of multimeter, those with
diode check function are available for the
checking.
Point of Measurement and Judgment Criteria

Turn OFF the power supply. Then, after a lapse of 10 minutes or more, make measurement of
resistance.
When using the analog type of multimeter,

make measurement in resistance measurement mode in the x1 k range.
Measuring point Judgment
No. Criteria Remarks
+ –
1 P2 U
2 P2 V 2 ~ 15 k ―
3 P2 W
4 U P2 Due to
condenser
5 V P2 charge and so
6 W P2 15 k and on, resistance
more measurement
7 N3 U (including  ) may require
8 N3 V some time.
9 N3 W
10 U N3
11 V N3 2 ~ 15 k ―
12 W N3
When using the digital type of multimeter, make measurement in diode check mode.
Measuring point Judgment
No. Remarks
+ – Criteria
1 P2 U Due to
condenser
2 P2 V charge and so
1.2 V and more on, resistance
measurement
3 P2 W may require
some time.
4 U P2
5 V P2
6 W P2
0.3 ~ 0.7 V ―
7 N3 U
8 N3 V
9 N3 W
10 U N3 Due to
condenser
11 V N3 charge and so
1.2 V and more on, resistance
measurement
12 W N3 may require
some time.

SiAF341904E Check
PCB and Circuit Diagram

P1 P2 P3
DM IGBT
X10A K2
J1
L1
J2
L2
L3
J3
N3
J1
J2
U V W
J3 X11A
Since the appearance of PCB shown in this outline drawing is different from
the actual appearance, use it as a reference drawing.
N3 U V W
P1 P3

Check SiAF341904E
6.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check

CHECK 6 In case of VRV systems, the only way to judge as the overcharge of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgment, refer to the information below.
Diagnosis of refrigerant overcharge

1. High pressure rises. Consequently, overload control is conducted to cause insufficient
cooling capacity.
2. The superheating degree of suction gas lowers (or wet operation is performed).
Consequently, the compressor becomes lower in discharge pipe temperature despite of
pressure loads.
3. The subcooling degree of condensate rises.
Cooling
High pressure
dropping control
High pressure Frequency comes to
gradually rises with the minimum level.
increase in
frequency. Subcooling degree
becomes higher.
(Liquid connection
High pressure pipe temperature
lowers.)
(Low pressure is
maintained at a
constant level.)
Low pressure
Low pressure rises due
to decreased
compressor output.
Frequency
To maintain low pressure, frequency

increases under the capacity
control.
(Degree of overcharge)
Proper amount Higher degree of overcharge

SiAF341904E Check
6.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check

CHECK 7 In case of VRV systems, the only way to judge as the shortage of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgment, refer to the information below.
Diagnosis of refrigerant shortage

1. The superheating degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the compressor discharge gas
temperature becomes higher.
2. The superheating degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the electronic expansion valve
turns open.
3. Low pressure drops to cause the unit not to demonstrate cooling capacity.
Cooling
The opening degree of the indoor unit Fan control is activated for high
electronic expansion valve becomes pressure protection under
larger. cooling control at low outdoor
Either of the electronic expansion air temperature, i.e., the fan is
valves becomes fully open. hunting at high pressure.
Frequency comes to the minimum level.
High pressure
(Low pressure
is maintained at High pressure drops
a constant with decrease in
level.) compressor capacity.
Low pressure
Low pressure rises as the
opening degree of the indoor
unit electronic expansion
valve becomes larger.
Frequency slightly increases If frequency comes to the
under the capacity control. minimum level, low
pressure cannot be
Frequency maintained.
To maintain low
pressure,
frequency drops
due to the
capacity control.
(Degree of refrigerant shortage)

Proper amount Higher degree of shortage

Check SiAF341904E
6.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure

CHECK 8 Conduct vacuuming and dehydration in the piping system following the procedure for Normal
vacuuming and dehydration described below.
Furthermore, if moisture may get mixed in the piping system, follow the procedure for Special
vacuuming and dehydration described below.
Normal vacuuming and dehydration

1. Vacuuming and dehydration
 Use a vacuum pump that enables vacuuming up to –100.7 kPa (5 torr, –755 mmHg).
 Connect manifold gauges to the service ports of liquid pipe and gas pipe and run the
vacuum pump for a period of two or more hours to conduct evacuation to –100.7 kPa or
less.
 If the degree of vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPa or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of two hours, moisture will have entered the system or refrigerant
leakage will have been caused. In this case, conduct evacuation for a period of another
one hour.
 If the degree of vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPa or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of three hours, conduct the leak tests.
2. Leaving in vacuum state
 Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of –100.7 kPa or less for a period of one
hour or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not rise. (If
the reading rises, moisture may have remained in the system or refrigerant leakage may
have been caused.)
3. Additional refrigerant charge
 Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary
amount of refrigerant.
Special vacuuming and dehydration
Use this procedure if moisture may get into the piping, such as construction during the rainy
season (dew condensation may occur, or rainwater may enter the piping during construction
work).
 Follow the same procedure as that for Normal vacuuming and dehydration described
above.
2. Vacuum break
 Pressurize with nitrogen gas up to 0.05 MPa.
 Conduct vacuuming and dehydration for a period of one hour or more. If the degree of
vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPa or less even though evacuation is conducted for a
period of two hours or more, repeat vacuum break - vacuuming and dehydration.
4. Leaving in vacuum state
 Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of –100.7 kPa or less for a period of one
hour or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not rise.
5. Additional refrigerant charge
 Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary
amount of refrigerant.

SiAF341904E Check
6.8 Thermistor Check

CHECK 11 Thermistor type of indoor units
R2T R3T
R1T R4T
Indoor heat Indoor heat
Model Suction air Discharge air
exchanger exchanger
thermistor (liquid) thermistor (gas) thermistor thermistor
FXFSQ-AR Type C Type A

FXMQ-PB
Type A –
FXMQ-AR Type B Type J
FXAQ-P
Thermistor type of outdoor units

Thermistor Type
R1T Outdoor air thermistor E
R21T Discharge pipe thermistor (for M1C) H
R22T Discharge pipe thermistor (for M2C) H
R3T Suction pipe thermistor A
R4T Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor A
R5T Subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor A
R6T Subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor A
R8T Compressor body thermistor (for M1C) H
R9T Compressor body thermistor (for M2C) H

Check SiAF341904E
Thermistor Resistance (k)

temperature
(°C) Type A Type B Type C
–30 363.8 361.7719 –
–25 266.8 265.4704 –
–20 197.8 196.9198 –
–15 148.2 147.5687 –
–10 112.0 111.6578 111.8
–5 85.52 85.2610 85.42
0 65.84 65.6705 65.80
5 51.05 50.9947 51.07
10 39.91 39.9149 39.97
15 31.44 31.4796 31.51
20 24.95 25.0060 25.02
25 19.94 20.0000 20.00
30 16.04 16.1008 16.10
35 12.99 13.0426 13.04
40 10.58 10.6281 10.63
45 8.669 8.7097 8.711
50 7.143 7.1764 7.179
55 5.918 5.9407 –
60 4.928 4.9439 –
65 4.123 4.1352 –
70 3.467 3.4757 –
75 – 2.9349 –
80 – 2.4894 –
85 – 2.1205 –
90 – 1.8138 –
95 – 1.5575 –
100 – 1.3425 –
105 – 1.1614 –
3SA48002
3SA48018
3SA48001 3S480014
Drawing No. 3SA48019 (AD87A001) (AD150384)
3S480003
(AD94A045)
This data is for reference purposes only.

SiAF341904E Check
Thermistor Resistance (k)

temperature
(°C) Type E Type H Type J
–30 362.4862 3257.371 359.8518
–25 265.9943 2429.222 265.0699
–20 197.3083 1827.883 197.1476
–15 147.8597 1387.099 147.7348
–10 111.8780 1061.098 111.7984
–5 85.4291 817.9329 85.3927
0 65.8000 635.0831 65.8000
5 51.0954 496.5712 51.1273
10 39.9938 391.0070 40.0423
15 31.5417 309.9511 31.5974
20 25.0554 247.2696 25.1125
25 20.0395 198.4674 20.0949
30 16.1326 160.2244 16.1860
35 13.0683 130.0697 13.1222
40 10.6490 106.1517 10.7042
45 8.7269 87.0725 8.7834
50 7.1905 71.7703 7.2479
55 5.9524 59.4735 6.0131
60 4.9536 49.5180 5.0144
65 4.1434 41.4168 4.2021
70 3.4825 34.7923 3.5381
75 2.9407 29.3499 2.9925
80 2.4943 24.8586 2.5420
85 2.1247 21.1360 2.1671
90 1.8173 18.0377 1.8554
95 1.5605 15.4487 1.5949
100 1.3451 13.2768 1.3764
105 1.1636 11.4395 1.1923
110 – 9.8902 1.0365
115 – 8.5788 0.9042
120 – 7.4650 0.7914
125 – 6.5156 0.6950
130 – 5.7038 0.6121
135 – 5.0073 0.5408
140 – 4.4080 0.4791
145 – 3.8907 0.4257
150 – 3.4429 0.3792
3SA48003 3SA48006 3SA48005
Drawing No.
(AD87A001) (AD87A001) (AD87A001)
This data is for reference purposes only.

Check SiAF341904E
6.9 Pressure Sensor Check

CHECK 12 Pressure Sensor and Voltage Characteristics
Detected Pressure
4.15 4.15
PH (MPa) = × VH – × 0.5
P H, P L 3.0 3.0
(kg/cm2)(MPa) 1.7 1.7
PL (MPa) = × VL – × 0.5
51.0 5.0 3.0 3.0
PH : High pressure (MPa)

45.9 4.5
High Pressure (PH) PL : Low pressure (MPa)
VH : Output Voltage (High Side) (VDC)
40.8 4.0 VL : Output Voltage (Low Side) (VDC)
35.7 3.5
30.6 3.0
25.5 2.5
20.4 2.0
Low Pressure (PL)
15.3 1.5
10.2 1.0
5.1 0.5
0 0
–5.1 –0.5
–0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
Output Voltage VH, VL (VDC)
Voltage Measurement Point of the High Pressure Sensor

+5 V
X32A (Red)
(4) Red
Black High
(3)
pressure
sensor
(2)
Microcomputer
A/D input (1) White
Make measurement of DC
voltage between these wires.
Voltage Measurement Point of the Low Pressure Sensor

+5 V
X31A (Blue)
(4) Red
(3) Black Low

pressure
Microcomputer
(2) White sensor
A/D input
(1)
Make measurement of DC voltage between these wires.

SiAF341904E Check
6.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires

CHECK 15 1. Procedure for checking outdoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring for broken wires
On the system shown below, turn OFF the power supply to all equipment, short circuit
between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal F1 and F2 in the "Outdoor Unit A" that is farthest
from the central remote controller, and then conduct continuity checks between the
transmission wiring terminal blocks F1 and F2 of the central remote controller using a
multimeter. If there is continuity between the said terminal blocks, the outdoor-outdoor unit
transmission wiring has no broken wires in it.
If there is no continuity, the transmission wiring may have broken wires. With the outdoor-
outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor Unit A" short circuited, conduct continuity checks
between the transmission wiring terminal blocks F1 and F2 of the unified ON/OFF controller.
If there is no continuity as well, conduct continuity checks between the outdoor-outdoor unit
terminal of the "Outdoor Unit E", between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor
Unit D", between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor Unit C", … in the order
described, thus identifying the place with continuity.
If the place with continuity can be identified, there may be broken wires in places before the
said place with continuity.

Check SiAF341904E
2. Procedure for checking indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring for broken wires (for
checking the indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring of the "Outdoor Unit C" for broken
wires)
Turn OFF the power supply to all equipment, short circuit between the indoor-outdoor unit
terminal F1 and F2 in the "Outdoor Unit C", and then conduct continuity checks between the
transmission wirings F1 and F2 of the "Indoor Unit a" that is farthest from the "Outdoor Unit
C" using a multimeter. If there is continuity between the said transmission wirings, the
indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring has no broken wires in it.
If there is no continuity, the transmission wiring may have broken wires. With the indoor-
outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor Unit C" short circuited, identify the place with continuity
in the transmission wiring of the "Indoor Unit b", transmission wiring of the "Indoor Unit c",
and transmission wiring of the "Indoor Unit d" in the order described.
If the place with continuity can be identified, there may be broken wires in places before the
said place with continuity.
1. Short circuit
between the
outdoor-outdoor
unit terminal
parts.
2. Short circuit between Outdoor-outdoor unit

the indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring
2. Check the transmission
wiring for continuity. Indoor-outdoor unit terminal parts.
If there is continuity, the transmission wiring
indoor-outdoor unit
transmission has no
broken wires in it.
1. Check the transmission

wiring for continuity.
If there is continuity, the
outdoor-outdoor unit
transmission has no broken
wires in it.
Unified ON/OFF controller Central remote controller

SiAF341904E Check
6.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable)

CHECK 16 Check the fan motor connector according to the following procedure.
Outdoor unit 1. Turn OFF the power supply.

2. Measure the resistance between phases of U, V, W at the motor side connectors (3-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector
or relay connector is disconnected.
Red U
White V
Black W
Indoor unit FXMQ50-140PB

Measurement of power wire connector.
Remove the X1A connector from the fan PCB (A2P) and measure the resistance between the
U and V, V and W, and W and U phases of the motor connector (with five conductors) and
check that each phase are balanced (within a permissible dispersion range of ±20%)
Connector power wire use (X1A)
Red (5) U
— (4)
White (3) V
— (2)
Black (1) W

Check SiAF341904E
6.12 Fan Motor Connector Check (Signal Cable)

CHECK 17 Resistance measuring points and judgment criteria.
FXMQ40PB, FXAQ-P
White (1) FG
Orange (2) Vsp
Brown (3) Vcc
Blue (4) GND
— (5) —
— (6) —
Red (7) Vdc
Measuring points Judgment criteria

1-4 1  or more
2-4 1  or more
3-4 1  or more
7-4 1  or more
FXMQ50-140PB
Measurement of signal wire connector.
Remove the X2A connector and measure the resistance between GND and Vcc, Hw, Hv, or Hu
terminals of the motor connector (with five conductors).
Connector signal wire use (X2A)
Gray (5) GND
Pink (4) Vcc
Orange (3) Hw
Blue (2) HV
Yellow (1) HU

SiAF341904E Check
6.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check

CHECK 18 Remove the connector for electronic expansion valve from PCB. Measure the resistance value
between pins and check the continuity to judge the condition.
The normal products will show the following conditions.
Outdoor unit
RXQ6-12A
X22A (Y2E) X25A (Y4E)
White (1) Orange (1)
Yellow (2) Red (2)
Orange (3) Yellow (3)
Blue (4) Black (4)
— (5) — (5)
Red (6) COM+Gray (6)

1-6
2-6
35-55 
3-6
4-6
RXQ14-20A
X22A (Y2E)
X25A (Y4E)
Orange (1)
Red (2)
Yellow (3)
Black (4)
— (5)
COM+Gray (6)

1-6
2-6
35-55 
3-6
4-6

Check SiAF341904E
Indoor unit
FXFSQ-AR, FXMQ-PB
Orange (1)
φ1
Gray (6) M
φ3
Yellow (3)
φ2 φ4
Red (2) Black (4)
Orange (1)
Red (2)
Yellow (3)
Black (4)
— (5)
Gray (6)

1-2 No continuity
1-3 92 
1-6 46 
2-4 92 
2-6 46 
FXAQ-P
White (1)
φ1
Red (5) M
φ3
Orange (3)
φ2 φ4
(2) (6) (4)

Yellow Brown Blue
White (1)
Yellow (2)
Orange (3)
Blue (4)
Red (5)
Brown (6)

1-2 No continuity
1-3 300 
1-5 150 
2-4 300 
2-6 150 

SiAF341904E Check
FXMQ-AR
White (1)
φ1
Red (6) M
φ3
Orange (3)
φ2 φ4
(2) (4)
Yellow Blue
Blue — Orange
(4) (5) (3)
(2) (6) (1)

Yellow Red White

1-2 No continuity
1-3 300 
1-6 150 
2-4 300 
2-6 150 

SiAF341904E
Part 7
Appendix
1. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................307
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................307
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit ...................................................................................310
306 Part 7 Appendix

SiAF341904E Wiring Diagrams
1. Wiring Diagrams
1.1 Outdoor Unit
RXQ6/8/10/12ARY1
3D112175E
Part 7 Appendix 307

Wiring Diagrams SiAF341904E
RXQ14ARY1
2D112174G
308 Part 7 Appendix

RXQ16/18/20ARY1
2D112524F
Part 7 Appendix 309

1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

1.2.1 Ceiling Mounted Cassette (Round Flow with Sensing) Type
FXFSQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140ARV1
3D121473
310 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.2 Auto Grille Panel

BYCQ125EASF (for FXFSQ)
3D108035
Part 7 Appendix 311

1.2.3 Ceiling Mounted Duct Type

FXMQ40/50/63/80/100/125/140PBV1
3D110450B
312 Part 7 Appendix

FXMQ40/50/63/80/100ARV1
3D112427A
Part 7 Appendix 313

1.2.4 Wall Mounted Type

FXAQ20/25/32PVE, FXAQ40/50/63PVER1
C: 3D076498B
314 Part 7 Appendix

Warning zz Daikin products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the world. Prior to
purchase, please confirm with your local authorized importer, distributor and/or retailer whether this
product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for use, in the region where the product
will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict or modify the application of any local
legislation.
zz Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
zz Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorized parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
zz Read the user's manual carefully before using this product. The user's manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any inquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion

1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
http://www.daikin.com/products/ac/
© All rights reserved
Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of April 2019 but subject to change without notice.
SiAF341904E
04/2019 AK.K

Daik Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Daik Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Daik Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SiAF341904E

High-COP Type RXQ12-44AHRY1 Series

Cooling Only 50/60 Hz

Part 1 General Information ............................................................ 8

Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit ............................................................. 41

Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................. 53

Part 4 Functions and Control ....................................................... 78

Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation .................................. 105

2.4 Normal Mode........................................................................................134

Part 6 Service Diagnosis ............................................................ 158

iii Table of Contents

5.24 Activation of Low Pressure Sensor ......................................................221

6.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable) ............................301

Part 7 Appendix .......................................................................... 306

1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the socket before

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the

Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting

Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when

In case of R-32 / R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes,

Do not clean the air conditioner with water.

Be sure to provide an earth / grounding when repairing the

Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled

Conduct welding work in a well-ventilated place.

1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the

Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and

Do not damage or modify the power cable.

When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to

Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

Check to see if parts and wires are mounted and connected

Check the earth / grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not

Be sure to measure insulation resistance after the repair, and make

Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

1. Model Names ..........................................................................................9

8 Part 1 General Information

1.2 Outdoor Unit

VRV X Series Standard Type

Part 1 General Information 9

Ceiling mounted duct type

10 Part 1 General Information

2.2 Outdoor Unit

Part 1 General Information 11

VRV X Series Standard Type

6, 8, 10, 12 HP 14, 16, 18, 20 HP

22, 24 HP 26, 28, 30 HP 32, 34, 36, 38, 40 HP

RXQ22ANRY1 RXQ26ANRY1 RXQ32ANRY1

42, 44 HP 46, 48, 50, 52, 54, 56, 58, 60 HP

12 Part 1 General Information

3. Combination of Outdoor Units

System capacity Number Module Outdoor unit multi

Part 1 General Information 13

VRV X Series Standard Type

System capacity Number Module Outdoor unit multi

14 Part 1 General Information

Max. connection ratio

Part 1 General Information 15

4.1.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations

16 Part 1 General Information